WO2022115845A1 - Système et procédé pour fournir des tickets générés par machine pour faciliter le suivi - Google Patents

Système et procédé pour fournir des tickets générés par machine pour faciliter le suivi Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022115845A1
WO2022115845A1 PCT/US2021/072541 US2021072541W WO2022115845A1 WO 2022115845 A1 WO2022115845 A1 WO 2022115845A1 US 2021072541 W US2021072541 W US 2021072541W WO 2022115845 A1 WO2022115845 A1 WO 2022115845A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
person
tracking system
sensor
pixel
items
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2021/072541
Other languages
English (en)
Inventor
Shahmeer Ali MIRZA
Original Assignee
7-Eleven, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US17/104,296 external-priority patent/US11023740B2/en
Application filed by 7-Eleven, Inc. filed Critical 7-Eleven, Inc.
Publication of WO2022115845A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022115845A1/fr

Links

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06Q—INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q20/00—Payment architectures, schemes or protocols
    • G06Q20/08—Payment architectures
    • G06Q20/20—Point-of-sale [POS] network systems
    • G06Q20/208—Input by product or record sensing, e.g. weighing or scanner processing
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G07—CHECKING-DEVICES
    • G07G—REGISTERING THE RECEIPT OF CASH, VALUABLES, OR TOKENS
    • G07G1/00—Cash registers
    • G07G1/0036—Checkout procedures
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G07—CHECKING-DEVICES
    • G07G—REGISTERING THE RECEIPT OF CASH, VALUABLES, OR TOKENS
    • G07G1/00—Cash registers
    • G07G1/12—Cash registers electronically operated
    • G07G1/14—Systems including one or more distant stations co-operating with a central processing unit

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates generally to a system and method for providing machine-generated tickets to facilitate tracking.
  • Identifying and tracking objects within a space poses several technical challenges.
  • Existing systems use various image processing techniques to identify objects (e.g. people). For example, these systems may identify different features of a person that can be used to later identify the person in an image. This process is computationally intensive when the image includes several people. For example, to identify a person in an image of a busy environment, such as a store, would involve identifying everyone in the image and then comparing the features for a person against every person in the image. In addition to being computationally intensive, this process requires a significant amount of time which means that this process is not compatible with real-time applications such as video streams. This problem becomes intractable when trying to simultaneously identify and track multiple objects. In addition, existing system lacks the ability to determine a physical location for an object that is located within an image.
  • Position tracking systems are used to track the physical positions of people and/or objects in a physical space (e.g., a store). These systems typically use a sensor (e.g., a camera) to detect the presence of a person and/or object and a computer to determine the physical position of the person and/or object based on signals from the sensor.
  • sensors e.g., a camera
  • other types of sensors can be installed to track the movement of inventory within the store.
  • weight sensors can be installed on racks and shelves to determine when items have been removed from those racks and shelves.
  • additional sensors can be installed throughout the space to track the position of people and/or objects as they move about the space.
  • additional cameras can be added to track positions in the larger space and additional weight sensors can be added to track additional items and shelves.
  • Increasing the number of cameras poses a technical challenge because each camera only provides a field of view for a portion of the physical space. This means that information from each camera needs to be processed independently to identify and track people and objects within the field of view of a particular camera. The information from each camera then needs to be combined and processed as a collective in order to track people and objects within the physical space.
  • the system disclosed in the present application provides a technical solution to the technical problems discussed above by generating a relationship between the pixels of a camera and physical locations within a space.
  • the disclosed system provides several practical applications and technical advantages which include 1) a process for generating a homography that maps pixels of a sensor (e.g. a camera) to physical locations in a global plane for a space (e.g.
  • a room 1) a process for determining a physical location for an object within a space using a sensor and a homography that is associated with the sensor; 3) a process for handing off tracking information for an object as the object moves from the field of view of one sensor to the field of view of another sensor; 4) a process for detecting when a sensor or a rack has moved within a space using markers; 5) a process for detecting where a person is interacting with a rack using a virtual curtain; 6) a process for associating an item with a person using a predefined zone that is associated with a rack; 7) a process for identifying and associating items with a non-uniform weight to a person; and 8) a process for identifying an item that has been misplaced on a rack based on its weight.
  • a cashierless store in the present application may be referred to a store where there may be no cashier to conduct a transaction for the shopper and the shopper does not use cash inside the store to purchase items.
  • a shopper may only have cash on their person which is not supported by the cashierless store.
  • the present disclosure contemplates an unconventional tracking system to facilitate the operation of the cashierless store such that the shopper is able to purchase one or more items from the cashierless store.
  • the tracking system generates a ticket for the shopper to use instead of cash in the cashierless store.
  • the ticket may be a physical, electrical, and/or virtual ticket. The tracking system generates the ticket for the shopper when the shopper provides a payment amount.
  • the payment amount may comprise any form of payment including a physical form of payment, such as an amount of cash, and a digital form of payment, such as an electronic payment, digital currencies, cryptocurrencies, among other forms of payment. These embodiments are described further below.
  • the payment amount may be provided to the tracking system via a computing device.
  • the computing device is not limited to any particular physical structure or dimension.
  • the computing device may provide a physical, digital, and/or virtual interface that enables generating the ticket (physical, electrical, and/or virtual) to grant access to the store in exchange for the payment amount.
  • the computing device may comprise a kiosk, a special-purpose device, a tablet, a laptop, a desktop computer, a mobile phone, an electronic device, among others. These embodiments are described further below.
  • the tracking system grants access to the store by implementing one or more methods.
  • the tracking system may grant access to the store by identifying the shopper at a turnstile gate at the entrance of the store.
  • the tracking system may implement an electronic, digital, or virtual curtain at the entrance of the store to identify the shopper, e.g., while the shopper is approaching the electronic curtain.
  • the tracking system may use an “honor system” to grant the shopper access to the store.
  • the tracking system uses the ticket to conduct a transaction for a shopping session of the shopper. As such, the tracking system uses the ticket to facilitate the operation of the cashierless store such that the shopper may not need to engage in a conventional check-out process.
  • the tracking system may allow the shopper to enter the store on an “honor system.”
  • the tracking system may use a screen notification system instead of or in addition to the turnstile gate.
  • the screen notification system may be positioned at the entrance of the store, and the shopper can identify themselves on the screen notification system.
  • the tracking system may be configured to implement an electronic, digital, or virtual curtain at the entrance of the store to identify (and authenticate) the shopper.
  • the tracking system captures sensor data indicating that the shopper is approaching the virtual curtain. For example, one or more cameras of the tracking system capture one or more images from the shopper approaching the virtual curtain.
  • the tracking system processes and analyzes the one or more images and determines the identity of the shopper, whether or not the shopper has provided a payment amount, the amount of the provided payment amount, the ticket associated with the shopper (physical, electrical, or virtual), and any other information that the tracking system would use to facilitate the operation of the cashierless store and the shopping session of the shopper.
  • the tracking server may use Radio Detection and Ranging (Radar) technologies to implement a virtual curtain at the entrance of the store.
  • the tracking system may further comprise one or more Radar sensors installed at or near the entrance of the store. These Radar sensors may continuously or periodically emit radio waves having a certain frequency. When the shopper comes within detection zones of these Radar sensors, they can detect the presence of the shopper based on radio waves that are reflected or bounced off the shopper.
  • Radar sensors installed at or near the entrance of the store. These Radar sensors may continuously or periodically emit radio waves having a certain frequency. When the shopper comes within detection zones of these Radar sensors, they can detect the presence of the shopper based on radio waves that are reflected or bounced off the shopper.
  • the tracking system may determine features of the person including a unique signature based on clothes of the shopper (e.g., material, color, shape, etc.), a unique signature based on accessories of the shopper (e.g., an umbrella, eyeglasses, etc.), biometric features of the shopper (e.g., facial features, pose estimation, etc.), among others.
  • clothes of the shopper e.g., material, color, shape, etc.
  • accessories of the shopper e.g., an umbrella, eyeglasses, etc.
  • biometric features of the shopper e.g., facial features, pose estimation, etc.
  • the tracking system may use Light Detection and Ranging (LiDAR) technologies to implement a virtual curtain.
  • the tracking system may further comprise one or more LiDAR sensors installed at or near the entrance of the store. Similar to the embodiment above where the tracking system uses Radar technologies, the tracking system 100 can detect that the person is approaching the virtual curtain by processing emitted and reflected light beams.
  • LiDAR Light Detection and Ranging
  • the tracking system may use infrared technologies to implement a virtual curtain.
  • the tracking system may further comprise one or more infrared sensors installed at or near the entrance of the store. Similar to the embodiment above where the tracking system uses Radar technologies, the tracking system can detect that the person is approaching the virtual curtain by processing sensor infrared sensor data captured by the infrared sensors.
  • the tracking system may be configured to implement a virtual curtain at the entrance of the store that is implemented by optical or light beams.
  • the light beams may comprise an invisible light, such as an infrared light.
  • the light beams may comprise a visible light, such as a photoelectric light.
  • the tracking system 100 may comprise a set of light beam emitters and receivers positioned at the entrance of the store.
  • the set of light beam emitters may be positioned on the ceiling at the entrance of the store, and the set of light bean receivers may be positioned on the floor at the entrance of the store.
  • the light beam emitters may be positioned on the floor at the entrance of the store, and the light beam receivers may be positioned on the ceiling at the entrance of the store. In another example, the light beam emitters and receivers may be positioned on the side walls at the entrance of the store.
  • Each of the light beam emitters may continuously or periodically emit light to its corresponding light beam receiver. For example, when a shopper passes the virtual curtain, it causes that the light emission from one or more particular light beam emitters do not reach to their corresponding light beam receivers. In this example, the shopper passing the virtual curtain further causes the light emission from the one or more particular light beam emitters to be reflected back to them. These reflected light emissions may have different frequency or wavelength shifts from the emitted light.
  • the time delay between the emitted light and the reflected light bounced off the shopper corresponds to the distance where the shopper caused the light emitted to be reflected.
  • the intensity of the reflected light may be indicative of a surface type at the point of reflection, such as a fabric, skin, plastic, etc.
  • those light beam receivers that did not receive light emissions may send a signal to the tracking server indicating that there is a breach in the virtual curtain.
  • the tracking system may determine features of the shopper including a unique signature based on clothes of the shopper (e.g., material, color, shape, etc.), a unique signature based on accessories of the shopper (e.g., an umbrella, eyeglasses, etc.), biometric features of the shopper (e.g., facial features, pose estimation, etc.), among others. As such, the tracking system may determine a particular shopper is passing the virtual curtain.
  • clothes of the shopper e.g., material, color, shape, etc.
  • accessories of the shopper e.g., an umbrella, eyeglasses, etc.
  • biometric features of the shopper e.g., facial features, pose estimation, etc.
  • the payment amount may comprise an amount of cash.
  • the payment amount may be provided to the tracking system in a physical form.
  • the payment amount may comprise an electronic payment.
  • the electronic payment may be linked to a digital wallet associated with the shopper.
  • the payment amount may be provided to the tracking system in a digital form.
  • the payment amount may comprise cryptocurrencies.
  • the cryptocurrencies may comprise Bitcoin (BTC), Bitcoin Cash (BCH), Litecoin (LTC), Ethereum (ETH), Binance Coin (BNB), and other forms of cryptocurrencies.
  • the payment amount may be provided using “cash cards” that are forms of digital currencies that can be equivalent to cash.
  • the cash card may be configured to be used physically in order to provide the payment amount.
  • the cash card may be swiped, scanned, or any other action may be performed that would cause the payment amount to be transferred to the tracking system.
  • the cash card may not be linked or associated with a financial institution.
  • the cash card may be linked or associated with a shopping profile or shopping account of the shopper in the store. In another example, the cash card may be linked or associated with a third-party organization account of the shopper.
  • the cash card may be a closed- loop card, which means that the cash card may be used in a limited geographical range area, such as a particular city or providence.
  • the cash card may be an open-loop card, which means that the cash card may be accepted anywhere, for example, in different stores, different establishments, online via Internet, etc. As such, in this embodiment, the cash card may be referred to as a universal method of payment.
  • the payment amount may comprise one or more digital currencies that are loaded in a “cash card.”
  • the cash card may be physically used to provide or transfer one or more digital currencies equivalent to cash to the tracking system.
  • the corresponding description below describes various embodiments of the computing device for generating the ticket in exchange for the payment amount.
  • the computing device is not limited to any particular physical structure or dimension.
  • the computing device may provide an interface (physical, digital, and/or virtual) that enables generating the ticket (physical, electrical, and/or virtual) to grant access to the store in exchange for the payment amount (physical, digital, and/or other forms of payment).
  • the computing device may provide physical interfaces.
  • the computing device may comprise a kiosk that is configured to receive the payment amount and provide a ticket in exchange.
  • the computing device may provide virtual interfaces.
  • the computing device may be configured to implement virtual reality technologies to interact with shoppers.
  • the computing device may project or display a virtual kiosk that is programmed to receive a payment amount, provide a ticket in exchange, among other functions.
  • the computing device may comprise a virtual reality device, such as a virtual reality headset, eyeglasses, and the like.
  • a virtual reality device such as a virtual reality headset, eyeglasses, and the like.
  • the shopper is able to interact with the virtual kiosk, for example, provide a payment amount, receive a ticket, etc.
  • the computing device may comprise a virtual reality dome or platform.
  • the virtual reality dome may include a dome in which a screen (flat or curved) displays the virtual kiosk in a virtual environment. The shopper may enter the dome and interact with the virtual kiosk.
  • the computing device may comprise an augmented reality device, such as an augmented reality headset, eyeglasses, and the like.
  • an augmented reality device such as an augmented reality headset, eyeglasses, and the like.
  • a shopper puts on the augmented reality device, they can observe the virtual kiosk.
  • the shopper can see the physical environment around them, such as the floor, their hands, etc.
  • the computing device may comprise an augmented reality dome or platform.
  • the augmented reality dome may include a dome in which a screen (flat or curved) displays the virtual kiosk among physical objects surrounding the shopper.
  • a shopper enters the augmented reality dome they can observe the virtual kiosk on the screen.
  • the shopper can see the physical environment around them, such as the floor, their hands, etc.
  • the computing device may provide a virtual interface.
  • the computing device may comprise a hyper-vision device that is configured to project a virtual interface in a four-dimensional display in a physical space to interact with the shopper.
  • the computing device may project a virtual interface in a holographic display in a physical space to interact with the shopper.
  • the computing device may comprise a special purpose device that is configured to receive the payment amount and provide a ticket in exchange.
  • the special-purpose device may be a hand-held device.
  • the special purpose device may include physical interfaces, such as a keypad, a screen, a scanner, and other interfaces that the shopper would use for providing a payment amount and receiving a ticket.
  • the special- purpose device may include digital interfaces.
  • the shopper may interact with the special-purpose device using a touchscreen, voice commands, gestures (e.g., hand gestures), and other digital interfaces.
  • the shopper may use any of the digital interfaces to indicate that they are providing a particular payment amount.
  • the shopper may identify themselves using their voice.
  • the device captures the voice of the shopper when they speak into a microphone associated with the device.
  • the special-purpose device communicates data comprising the voice of the shopper to the tracking system for processing.
  • the tracking system recognizes a unique voice signature of the shopper by extracting voice features of the shopper.
  • the tracking system compares the voice features of the shopper with stored voice features (associated with a plurality of shoppers) in a memory of the tracking system. If a match is found, the tracking system identifies and authenticates the shopper.
  • the shopper may identify themselves using their unique hand gesture signature.
  • the computing device may comprise an electronic device, such as a tablet, a mobile phone, a laptop, a desktop computer, and the like.
  • functionalities to facilitate the operation of the cashierless store including receiving a payment amount and providing a ticket to a shopper may be implemented in an electronic device that can provide such functionalities and interact with the shopper.
  • a ticket is provided to the shopper that corresponds to one or more of a payment amount provided by the shopper before passing a turnstile gate at an entrance of the store, biometric features of the shopper, a unique signature based at least in part upon clothes and/or accessories of the shopper, and a physical stature of the shopper are used to facilitate tracking the shopper in the cashierless store.
  • the disclosed system in the present application is configured to facilitate operation of the cashierless store.
  • the disclosed system is configured to provide a machine-generated ticket (physical or electrical) to the shopper to use instead of cash to purchase items in the cashierless store.
  • the ticket may be provided to the shopper when the shopper provides a payment amount to a kiosk before entering the store.
  • the payment amount may include an amount of cash and/or electronic payment, e.g., using a digital wallet.
  • the disclosed system is configured to use biometric features of a shopper to facilitate tracking the shopper in the cashierless store.
  • the biometric features of the shopper are used as a virtual ticket instead of a physical or an electronic ticket of the first embodiment described above.
  • one or more images of the shopper may be captured when the shopper provides the payment amount to the kiosk before entering the store.
  • the biometric features of the shopper may be extracted and used as the virtual ticket to facilitate tracking the shopper in the cashierless store.
  • the biometric features of the shopper may include one or more of facial features, pose estimations, among other features.
  • the system disclosed herein contemplates using any combination of a ticket (physical or electrical) and features of the shopper to identify and authenticate the identity of the shopper during their shopping session, such as when the shopper is providing a payment amount at the kiosk, entering the store, selecting items in the store, providing an additional payment amount at a second kiosk inside the store, concluding a transaction in a check-out process, exiting the store, and receiving change remaining from the transaction (if there is any).
  • the system disclosed herein provides technical solutions to the technical problems discussed above and provides several practical applications and technical advantages which include: 1) utilizing a first computing device that is configured to receive a payment amount from a shopper and provide a ticket (physical or electrical) to the shopper, where the payment amount may include one or more of an amount of cash and an electronic payment, and where the ticket includes a unique code that corresponds to one or more of the payment amount and a representation of features of the shopper.
  • the first computing device may comprise a first physical kiosk, a first virtual kiosk, a tablet, a hand-held device, a special-purpose device, etc., as described above; 2) a process for using the ticket (physical or electrical) to identify the shopper during their shopping session and conclude a transaction of their shopping session; 3) a process for using the features of the shopper to identify the shopper during their shopping session and conclude a transaction of their shopping session; 4) a process for using the ticket to identify the shopper at a second computing device (e.g, a second kiosk) inside the store where the shopper provides an additional payment amount, in case during a check-out process, the total cash value of items that the shopper has selected is more than the payment amount they initially provided at the first kiosk.
  • a second computing device e.g, a second kiosk
  • one or more functionalities of the second kiosk may be implemented in a tablet, a laptop, a mobile phone, a hand-held device, an electronic device, etc.; 5) a process for using the features of the shopper to identify the shopper at the second kiosk inside the store where the shopper provides the additional payment amount, in case during the check-out process, the total cash value of items that the shopper has selected is more than the payment amount they initially provided at the first kiosk; 6) a process for using the ticket to identify the shopper to return change that is remained from the transaction of the shopping session to the shopper (if there is any); and 7) a process for using the features of the shopper to identify the shopper to return the change that is remained from the transaction of the shopping session to the shopper (if there is any).
  • the tracking system may be configured to generate homographies for sensors.
  • a homography is configured to translate between pixel locations in an image from a sensor (e.g. a camera) and physical locations in a physical space.
  • the tracking system determines coefficients for a homography based on the physical location of markers in a global plane for the space and the pixel locations of the markers in an image from a sensor. This configuration will be described in more detail using FIGS. 2-7.
  • the tracking system is configured to calibrate a shelf position within the global plane using sensors.
  • the tracking system periodically compares the current shelf location of a rack to an expected shelf location for the rack using a sensor. In the event that the current shelf location does not match the expected shelf location, then the tracking system uses one or more other sensors to determine whether the rack has moved or whether the first sensor has moved. This configuration will be described in more detail using FIGS. 8 and 9.
  • the tracking system is configured to hand off tracking information for an object (e.g. a person) as it moves between the field of views of adjacent sensors.
  • the tracking system tracks an object’s movement within the field of view of a first sensor and then hands off tracking information (e.g. an object identifier) for the object as it enters the field of view of a second adjacent sensor. This configuration will be described in more detail using FIGS. 10 and 11.
  • the tracking system is configured to detect shelf interactions using a virtual curtain.
  • the tracking system is configured to process an image captured by a sensor to determine where a person is interacting with a shelf of a rack.
  • the tracking system uses a predetermined zone within the image as a virtual curtain that is used to determine which region and which shelf of a rack that a person is interacting with. This configuration will be described in more detail using FIGS. 12-14.
  • the tracking system is configured to detect when an item has been picked up from a rack and to determine which person to assign the item to using a predefined zone that is associated with the rack. In this configuration, the tracking system detects that an item has been picked up using a weight sensor. The tracking system then uses a sensor to identify a person within a predefined zone that is associated with the rack. Once the item and the person have been identified, the tracking system will add the item to a digital cart that is associated with the identified person. This configuration will be described in more detail using FIGS. 15 and 18.
  • the tracking system is configured to identify an object that has a non-uniform weight and to assign the item to a person’s digital cart.
  • the tracking system uses a sensor to identify markers (e.g. text or symbols) on an item that has been picked up.
  • the tracking system uses the identified markers to then identify which item was picked up.
  • the tracking system uses the sensor to identify a person within a predefined zone that is associated with the rack. Once the item and the person have been identified, the tracking system will add the item to a digital cart that is associated with the identified person. This configuration will be described in more detail using FIGS.16 and 18.
  • the tracking system is configured to detect and identify items that have been misplaced on a rack. For example, a person may put back an item in the wrong location on the rack.
  • the tracking system uses a weight sensor to detect that an item has been put back on rack and to determine that the item is not in the correct location based on its weight.
  • the tracking system uses a sensor to identify the person that put the item on the rack and analyzes their digital cart to determine which item they put back based on the weights of the items in their digital cart. This configuration will be described in more detail using FIGS. 17 and 18.
  • the tracking system is configured to determine pixel regions from images generated by each sensor which should be excluded during obj ect tracking. These pixel regions, or “auto-exclusion zones,” may be updated regularly (e.g., during times when there are no people moving through a space). The auto-exclusion zones may be used to generate a map of the physical portions of the space that are excluded during tracking. This configuration is described in more detail using FIGS. 19 through 21
  • the tracking system is configured to distinguish between closely spaced people in a space. For instance, when two people are standing, or otherwise located, near each other, it may be difficult or impossible for a previous systems to distinguish between these people, particularly based on top-view images.
  • the system identifies contours at multiple depths in top-view depth images in order to individually detect closely spaced objects. This configuration is described in more detail using FIGS. 22 and 23.
  • the tracking system is configured to track people both locally (e.g., by tracking pixel positions in images received from each sensor) and globally (e.g., by tracking physical positions on a global plane corresponding to the physical coordinates in the space).
  • Person tracking may be more reliable when performed both locally and globally. For example, if a person is “lost” locally (e.g., if a sensor fails to capture a frame and a person is not detected by the sensor), the person may still be tracked globally based on an image from a nearby sensor, an estimated local position of the person determined using a local tracking algorithm, and/or an estimated global position determined using a global tracking algorithm. This configuration is described in more detail using FIGS. 24A-C through 26.
  • the tracking system is configured to maintain a record, which is referred to in this disclosure as a “candidate list,” of possible person identities, or identifiers (i.e., the usernames, account numbers, etc. of the people being tracked), during tracking.
  • a candidate list is generated and updated during tracking to establish the possible identities of each tracked person.
  • the candidate list also includes a probability that the identity, or identifier, is believed to be correct.
  • the candidate list is updated following interactions (e.g., collisions) between people and in response to other uncertainty events (e.g., a loss of sensor data, imaging errors, intentional trickery, etc.). This configuration is described in more detail using FIGS. 27 and 28.
  • the tracking system is configured to employ a specially structured approach for object re-identification when the identity of a tracked person becomes uncertain or unknown (e.g., based on the candidate lists described above). For example, rather than relying heavily on resource-expensive machine learning-based approaches to re-identify people, “lower-cost” descriptors related to observable characteristics (e.g., height, color, width, volume, etc.) of people are used first for person re-identification. “Higher-cost” descriptors (e.g., determined using artificial neural network models) are used when the lower-cost descriptors cannot provide reliable results.
  • a person may first be re-identified based on his/her height, hair color, and/or shoe color. However, if these descriptors are not sufficient for reliably re-identifying the person (e.g., because other people being tracked have similar characteristics), progressively higher-level approaches may be used (e.g., involving artificial neural networks that are trained to recognize people) which may be more effective at person identification but which generally involve the use of more processing resources. These configurations are described in more detail using FIGS. 29 through 32.
  • the tracking system is configured to employ a cascade of algorithms (e.g., from more simple approaches based on relatively straightforwardly determined image features to more complex strategies involving artificial neural networks) to assign an item picked up from a rack to the correct person.
  • the cascade may be triggered, for example, by (i) the proximity of two or more people to the rack, (ii) a hand crossing into the zone (or a “virtual curtain”) adjacent to the rack, and/or (iii) a weight signal indicating an item was removed from the rack.
  • the tracking system is configured to employ a unique contour-based approach to assign an item to the correct person.
  • a contour may be “dilated” from a head height to a lower height in order to determine which person’s arm reached into the rack to pick up the item. If the results of this computationally efficient contour-based approach do not satisfy certain confidence criteria, a more computationally expensive approach may be used involving pose estimation.
  • the tracking system is configured to track an item after it exits a rack, identify a position at which the item stops moving, and determines which person is nearest to the stopped item.
  • the nearest person is generally assigned the item. This configuration may be used, for instance, when an item cannot be assigned to the correct person even using an artificial neural network for pose estimation. This configuration is described in more detail using FIGS. 36A,B and 37.
  • the tracking system is configured to facilitate the operation of a cashierless store.
  • the tracking system comprises a set of cameras, a kiosk, and a tracking server.
  • a physical or an electrical ticket is provided to the person when the person provides a payment amount to the kiosk.
  • the tracking system generates a session identifier for the person.
  • the session identifier is associated with the payment amount and a unique code.
  • the unique code corresponds to at least one of the payment amount and a representation of features of the person.
  • the tracking server sends a message to the kiosk to provide a machine-generated ticket corresponding to the payment amount and the unique code to the person.
  • the tracking server identifies the person at a turnstile gate at an entrance of the store using one or more of the ticket and the features of the person. For example, the tracking server identifies the person when the person scans their ticket by a scanner at the turnstile gate. In another example, the tracking server identifies the person based on features of the person extracted from an image feed captured by the set of cameras. Similarly, the tracking server identifies the person at a checkout location using one or more of the ticket and the features of the person. The tracking server receives a digital cart associated with the person comprising items and a total cash value of those items. The tracking server concludes a transaction by deducting the total cash value from the payment amount. This configuration is described in more detail using FIGS. 39-41.
  • the kiosk receives a payment amount from the person.
  • the tracking server receives an image feed of the person at the kiosk from the set of cameras.
  • the tracking server extracts features of the person from the image feed.
  • the tracking server generates a session identifier for the person.
  • the session identifier is associated with the payment amount and extracted features of the person.
  • the tracking server identifies the person at a turnstile gate at an entrance of the store based on the extracted features of the person.
  • the tracking server identifies the person at a check-out location based on the extracted features of the person.
  • the tracking server receives a digital cart associated with the person comprising items and a total cash value of those items.
  • the tracking server concludes a transaction by deducting the total cash value from the payment amount. This configuration is described in more detail using FIGS. 39, 40, and 42.
  • FIG. 1 illustrates a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a tracking system configured to track objects within a space
  • FIG. 2 illustrates a flowchart of an embodiment of a sensor mapping method for the tracking system
  • FIG. 3 illustrates an example of a sensor mapping process for the tracking system
  • FIG. 4 illustrates an example of a frame from a sensor in the tracking system
  • FIG. 5 A illustrates an example of a sensor mapping for a sensor in the tracking system
  • FIG. 5B illustrates another example of a sensor mapping for a sensor in the tracking system
  • FIG. 6 illustrates a flowchart of an embodiment of a sensor mapping method for the tracking system using a marker grid
  • FIG. 7 illustrates an example of a sensor mapping process for the tracking system using a marker grid
  • FIG. 8 illustrates a flowchart of an embodiment of a shelf position calibration method for the tracking system
  • FIG. 9 illustrates an example of a shelf position calibration process for the tracking system
  • FIG. 10 illustrates a flowchart of an embodiment of a tracking hand off method for the tracking system
  • FIG. 11 illustrates an example of a tracking hand off process for the tracking system
  • FIG. 12 illustrates a flowchart of an embodiment of a shelf interaction detection method for the tracking system
  • FIG. 13 illustrates a front view of an example of a shelf interaction detection process for the tracking system
  • FIG. 14 illustrates an overhead view of an example of a shelf interaction detection process for the tracking system
  • FIG. 15 illustrates a flowchart of an embodiment of an item assigning method for the tracking system
  • FIG. 16 illustrates a flowchart of an embodiment of an item identification method for the tracking system
  • FIG. 17 illustrates a flowchart of an embodiment of a misplaced item identification method for the tracking system
  • FIG. 18 illustrates an example of an item identification process for the tracking system
  • FIG. 19 illustrates a diagram of the determination and use of auto-exclusion zones by the tracking system
  • FIG. 20 illustrates an example auto-exclusion zone map generated by the tracking system
  • FIG. 21 illustrates a flowchart of an example method of generating and using auto-exclusion zones for object tracking using the tracking system
  • FIG. 22 illustrates a diagram of the detection of closely spaced objects using the tracking system
  • FIG. 23 illustrates a flowchart of an example method of detecting closely spaced objects using the tracking system
  • FIGS. 24A-C illustrate diagrams of the tracking of a person in local image frames and in the global plane of space 102 using the tracking system
  • FIGS. 25A-B illustrate the implementation of a particle filter tracker by the tracking system
  • FIG. 26 illustrates a flow diagram of an example method of local and global object tracking using the tracking system
  • FIG. 27 illustrates a diagram of the use of candidate lists for object identification during object tracking by the tracking system
  • FIG. 28 illustrates a flowchart of an example method of maintaining candidate lists during object tracking by the tracking system
  • FIG. 29 illustrates a diagram of an example tracking subsystem for use in the tracking system
  • FIG. 30 illustrates a diagram of the determination of descriptors based on object features using the tracking system
  • FIGS. 31A-C illustrate diagrams of the use of descriptors for re-identification during object tracking by the tracking system
  • FIG. 32 illustrates a flowchart of an example method of object re-identification during object tracking using the tracking system
  • FIGS. 33A-C illustrate diagrams of the assignment of an item to a person using the tracking system
  • FIG. 34 illustrates a flowchart of an example method for assigning an item to a person using the tracking system
  • FIG. 35 illustrates a flowchart of an example method of contour dilation-based item assignment using the tracking system
  • FIGS. 36A-B illustrate diagrams of item tracking-based item assignment using the tracking system
  • FIG. 37 illustrates a flowchart of an example method of item tracking-based item assignment using the tracking system
  • FIG. 38 illustrates an embodiment of a device configured to track objects within a space
  • FIG. 39 illustrates an example tracking system
  • FIG. 40 illustrates an operational flow of the tracking system illustrated in FIG. 39
  • FIG. 41 illustrates a first example flowchart for operating the tracking system illustrated in FIG. 39;
  • FIG. 42 illustrates a second example flowchart for operating the tracking system illustrated in FIG. 39.
  • FIG. 43 illustrates a hardware configuration of the tracking system illustrated in
  • FIG. 39 DETAILED DESCRIPTION
  • Position tracking systems are used to track the physical positions of people and/or objects in a physical space (e.g., a store). These systems typically use a sensor (e.g., a camera) to detect the presence of a person and/or object and a computer to determine the physical position of the person and/or object based on signals from the sensor.
  • sensors e.g., a camera
  • other types of sensors can be installed to track the movement of inventory within the store.
  • weight sensors can be installed on racks and shelves to determine when items have been removed from those racks and shelves.
  • additional sensors can be installed throughout the space to track the position of people and/or objects as they move about the space.
  • additional cameras can be added to track positions in the larger space and additional weight sensors can be added to track additional items and shelves.
  • Increasing the number of cameras poses a technical challenge because each camera only provides a field of view for a portion of the physical space. This means that information from each camera needs to be processed independently to identify and track people and objects within the field of view of a particular camera. The information from each camera then needs to be combined and processed as a collective in order to track people and objects within the physical space.
  • 16/663,500 entitled “Action Detection During Image Tracking” (attorney docket no. 090278.0190) now U.S. Patent No. 10,621,444; U.S. Patent Application No. 16/664,219 entitled “Object Re-Identification During Image Tracking” (attorney docket no. 090278.0191); U.S. Patent Application No. 16/664,269 entitled “Vector-Based Object Re-Identification During Image Tracking” (attorney docket no. 090278.0192); U.S. Patent Application No. 16/664,332 entitled “Image-Based Action Detection Using Contour Dilation” (attorney docket no.
  • 16/663,633 entitled, “Scalable Position Tracking System For Tracking Position In Large Spaces” (attorney docket no. 090278.0176); and U.S. Patent Application No. 16/664,470 entitled, “Customer-Based Video Feed” (attorney docket no. 090278.0187) which are all hereby incorporated by reference herein as if reproduced in their entirety.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a tracking system 100 that is configured to track objects within a space 102.
  • the tracking system 100 may be installed in a space 102 (e.g. a store) so that shoppers need not engage in the conventional checkout process.
  • a space 102 e.g. a store
  • this disclosure contemplates that the tracking system 100 may be installed and used in any type of physical space (e.g. a room, an office, an outdoor stand, a mall, a supermarket, a convenience store, a pop-up store, a warehouse, a storage center, an amusement park, an airport, an office building, etc.).
  • the tracking system 100 (or components thereof) is used to track the positions of people and/or objects within these spaces 102 for any suitable purpose.
  • the tracking system 100 can track the positions of travelers and employees for security purposes.
  • the tracking system 100 can track the positions of park guests to gauge the popularity of attractions.
  • the tracking system 100 can track the positions of employees and staff to monitor their productivity levels.
  • the space 102 is a store that comprises a plurality of items that are available for purchase.
  • the tracking system 100 may be installed in the store so that shoppers need not engage in the conventional checkout process to purchase items from the store.
  • the store may be a convenience store or a grocery store.
  • the store may not be a physical building, but a physical space or environment where shoppers may shop.
  • the store may be a grab and go pantry at an airport, a kiosk in an office building, an outdoor market at a park, etc.
  • the space 102 comprises one or more racks 112.
  • Each rack 112 comprises one or more shelves that are configured to hold and display items.
  • the space 102 may comprise refrigerators, coolers, freezers, or any other suitable type of furniture for holding or displaying items for purchase.
  • the space 102 may be configured as shown or in any other suitable configuration.
  • the space 102 is a physical structure that includes an entryway through which shoppers can enter and exit the space 102.
  • the space 102 comprises an entrance area 114 and an exit area 116. Areas 114 and 116 may be used interchangeably. In some embodiments, the entrance area 114 and the exit area 116 may overlap or are the same area within the space 102.
  • the entrance area 114 is adjacent to an entrance (e.g. a door) of the space 102 where a person enters the space 102.
  • the entrance area 114 may comprise a turnstile or gate that controls the flow of traffic into the space 102.
  • the entrance area 114 may comprise a turnstile that only allows one person to enter the space 102 at a time.
  • the entrance area 114 may be adjacent to one or more devices (e.g. sensors 108 or a scanner 115) that identify a person as they enter space 102.
  • a sensor 108 may capture one or more images of a person as they enter the space 102.
  • a person may identify themselves using a scanner 115.
  • scanners 115 include, but are not limited to, a QR code scanner, a barcode scanner, a near-field communication (NFC) scanner, or any other suitable type of scanner that can receive an electronic code embedded with information that uniquely identifies a person.
  • a shopper may scan a personal device (e.g. a smart phone) on a scanner 115 to enter the store.
  • the personal device may provide the scanner 115 with an electronic code that uniquely identifies the shopper. After the shopper is identified and/or authenticated, the shopper is allowed to enter the store. In one embodiment, each shopper may have a registered account with the store to receive an identification code for the personal device.
  • the shopper may move around the interior of the store. As the shopper moves throughout the space 102, the shopper may shop for items by removing items from the racks 112. The shopper can remove multiple items from the racks 112 in the store to purchase those items.
  • the shopper may leave the store via the exit area 116.
  • the exit area 116 is adjacent to an exit (e.g. a door) of the space 102 where a person leaves the space 102.
  • the exit area 116 may comprise a turnstile or gate that controls the flow of traffic out of the space 102.
  • the exit area 116 may comprise a turnstile that only allows one person to leave the space 102 at a time.
  • the exit area 116 may be adjacent to one or more devices (e.g. sensors 108 or a scanner 115) that identify a person as they leave the space 102.
  • a shopper may scan their personal device on the scanner 115 before a turnstile or gate will open to allow the shopper to exit the store.
  • the personal device may provide an electronic code that uniquely identifies the shopper to indicate that the shopper is leaving the store.
  • an account for the shopper is charged for the items that the shopper removed from the store.
  • the tracking system 100 allows the shopper to leave the store with their items without engaging in a conventional checkout process.
  • a global plane 104 is defined for the space 102.
  • the global plane 104 is a user- defined coordinate system that is used by the tracking system 100 to identify the locations of objects within a physical domain (i.e. the space 102).
  • a global plane 104 is defined such that an x-axis and a y-axis are parallel with a floor of the space 102.
  • the z-axis of the global plane 104 is perpendicular to the floor of the space 102.
  • a location in the space 102 is defined as a reference location 101 or origin for the global plane 104.
  • the global plane 104 is defined such that reference location 101 corresponds with a comer of the store. In other examples, the reference location 101 may be located at any other suitable location within the space 102.
  • physical locations within the space 102 can be described using (x,y) coordinates in the global plane 104.
  • the global plane 104 may be defined such that one unit in the global plane 104 corresponds with one meter in the space 102.
  • an x-value of one in the global plane 104 corresponds with an offset of one meter from the reference location 101 in the space 102.
  • a person that is standing in the comer of the space 102 at the reference location 101 will have an (x,y) coordinate with a value of (0,0) in the global plane 104.
  • the global plane 104 may be expressed using inches, feet, or any other suitable measurement units.
  • the tracking system 100 uses (x,y) coordinates of the global plane 104 to track the location of people and objects within the space 102. For example, as a shopper moves within the interior of the store, the tracking system 100 may track their current physical location within the store using (x,y) coordinates of the global plane 104.
  • the tracking system 100 comprises one or more clients 105, one or more servers 106, one or more scanners 115, one or more sensors 108, and one or more weight sensors 110.
  • the one or more clients 105, one or more servers 106, one or more scanners 115, one or more sensors 108, and one or more weight sensors 110 may be in signal communication with each other over a network 107.
  • the network 107 may be any suitable type of wireless and/or wired network including, but not limited to, all or a portion of the Internet, an Intranet, a Bluetooth network, a WIFI network, a Zigbee network, a Z-wave network, a private network, a public network, a peer-to-peer network, the public switched telephone network, a cellular network, a local area network (LAN), a metropolitan area network (MAN), a wide area network (WAN), and a satellite network.
  • the network 107 may be configured to support any suitable type of communication protocol as would be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • the tracking system 100 may be configured as shown or in any other suitable configuration.
  • the tracking system 100 is configured to use sensors 108 to identify and track the location of people and objects within the space 102. For example, the tracking system 100 uses sensors 108 to capture images or videos of a shopper as they move within the store. The tracking system 100 may process the images or videos provided by the sensors 108 to identify the shopper, the location of the shopper, and/or any items that the shopper picks up.
  • sensors 108 include, but are not limited to, cameras, video cameras, web cameras, printed circuit board (PCB) cameras, depth sensing cameras, time-of- flight cameras, LiDARs, structured light cameras, or any other suitable type of imaging device.
  • PCB printed circuit board
  • Each sensor 108 is positioned above at least a portion of the space 102 and is configured to capture overhead view images or videos of at least a portion of the space 102.
  • the sensors 108 are generally configured to produce videos of portions of the interior of the space 102.
  • These videos may include frames or images 302 of shoppers within the space 102.
  • Each frame 302 is a snapshot of the people and/or objects within the field of view of a particular sensor 108 at a particular moment in time.
  • a frame 302 may be a two-dimensional (2D) image or a three-dimensional (3D) image (e.g. a point cloud or a depth map). In this configuration, each frame 302 is of a portion of a global plane 104 for the space 102. Referring to FIG.
  • a frame 302 comprises a plurality of pixels that are each associated with a pixel location 402 within the frame 302.
  • the tracking system 100 uses pixel locations 402 to describe the location of an object with respect to pixels in a frame 302 from a sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 can identify the location of different marker 304 within the frame 302 using their respective pixel locations 402.
  • the pixel location 402 corresponds with a pixel row and a pixel column where a pixel is located within the frame 302.
  • each pixel is also associated with a pixel value 404 that indicates a depth or distance measurement in the global plane 104.
  • a pixel value 404 may correspond with a distance between a sensor 108 and a surface in the space 102.
  • Each sensor 108 has a limited field of view within the space 102. This means that each sensor 108 may only be able to capture a portion of the space 102 within their field of view.
  • the tracking system 100 may use multiple sensors 108 configured as a sensor array. In FIG. 1, the sensors 108 are configured as a three by four sensor array. In other examples, a sensor array may comprise any other suitable number and/or configuration of sensors 108. In one embodiment, the sensor array is positioned parallel with the floor of the space 102. In some embodiments, the sensor array is configured such that adjacent sensors 108 have at least partially overlapping fields of view.
  • each sensor 108 captures images or frames 302 of a different portion of the space 102 which allows the tracking system 100 to monitor the entire space 102 by combining information from frames 302 of multiple sensors 108.
  • the tracking system 100 is configured to map pixel locations 402 within each sensor 108 to physical locations in the space 102 using homographies 118.
  • a homography 118 is configured to translate between pixel locations 402 in a frame 302 captured by a sensor 108 and (x,y) coordinates in the global plane 104 (i.e. physical locations in the space 102).
  • the tracking system 100 uses homographies 118 to correlate between a pixel location 402 in a particular sensor 108 with a physical location in the space 102.
  • the tracking system 100 uses homographies 118 to determine where a person is physically located in the space 102 based on their pixel location 402 within a frame 302 from a sensor 108. Since the tracking system 100 uses multiple sensors 108 to monitor the entire space 102, each sensor 108 is uniquely associated with a different homography 118 based on the sensor’s 108 physical location within the space 102. This configuration allows the tracking system 100 to determine where a person is physically located within the entire space 102 based on which sensor 108 they appear in and their location within a frame 302 captured by that sensor 108. Additional information about homographies 118 is described in FIGS. 2-7.
  • the tracking system 100 is configured to use weight sensors 110 to detect and identify items that a person picks up within the space 102.
  • the tracking system 100 uses weight sensors 110 that are located on the shelves of a rack 112 to detect when a shopper removes an item from the rack 112.
  • Each weight sensor 110 may be associated with a particular item which allows the tracking system 100 to identify which item the shopper picked up.
  • a weight sensor 110 is generally configured to measure the weight of objects (e.g. products) that are placed on or near the weight sensor 110.
  • a weight sensor 110 may comprise a transducer that converts an input mechanical force (e.g. weight, tension, compression, pressure, or torque) into an output electrical signal (e.g. current or voltage). As the input force increases, the output electrical signal may increase proportionally.
  • the tracking system 100 is configured to analyze the output electrical signal to determine an overall weight for the items on the weight sensor 110.
  • weight sensors 110 include, but are not limited to, a piezoelectric load cell or a pressure sensor.
  • a weight sensor 110 may comprise one or more load cells that are configured to communicate electrical signals that indicate a weight experienced by the load cells.
  • the load cells may produce an electrical current that varies depending on the weight or force experienced by the load cells.
  • the load cells are configured to communicate the produced electrical signals to a server 105 and/or a client 106 for processing.
  • Weight sensors 110 may be positioned onto furniture (e.g. racks 112) within the space 102 to hold one or more items.
  • one or more weight sensors 110 may be positioned on a shelf of a rack 112.
  • one or more weight sensors 110 may be positioned on a shelf of a refrigerator or a cooler.
  • one or more weight sensors 110 may be integrated with a shelf of a rack 112.
  • weight sensors 110 may be positioned in any other suitable location within the space 102.
  • a weight sensor 110 may be associated with a particular item.
  • a weight sensor 110 may be configured to hold one or more of a particular item and to measure a combined weight for the items on the weight sensor 110.
  • the weight sensor 110 is configured to detect a weight decrease.
  • the weight sensor 110 is configured to use stored information about the weight of the item to determine a number of items that were removed from the weight sensor 110.
  • a weight sensor 110 may be associated with an item that has an individual weight of eight ounces. When the weight sensor 110 detects a weight decrease of twenty-four ounces, the weight sensor 110 may determine that three of the items were removed from the weight sensor 110.
  • the weight sensor 110 is also configured to detect a weight increase when an item is added to the weight sensor 110. For example, if an item is returned to the weight sensor 110, then the weight sensor 110 will determine a weight increase that corresponds with the individual weight for the item associated with the weight sensor 110.
  • a server 106 may be formed by one or more physical devices configured to provide services and resources (e.g. data and/or hardware resources) for the tracking system 100. Additional information about the hardware configuration of a server 106 is described in FIG. 38.
  • a server 106 may be operably coupled to one or more sensors 108 and/or weight sensors 110.
  • the tracking system 100 may comprise any suitable number of servers 106.
  • the tracking system 100 may comprise a first server 106 that is in signal communication with a first plurality of sensors 108 in a sensor array and a second server 106 that is in signal communication with a second plurality of sensors 108 in the sensor array.
  • the tracking system 100 may comprise a first server 106 that is in signal communication with a plurality of sensors 108 and a second server 106 that is in signal communication with a plurality of weight sensors 110.
  • the tracking system 100 may comprise any other suitable number of servers 106 that are each in signal communication with one or more sensors 108 and/or weight sensors 110.
  • a server 106 may be configured to process data (e.g. frames 302 and/or video) for one or more sensors 108 and/or weight sensors 110.
  • a server 106 may be configured to generate homographies 118 for sensors 108.
  • the generated homographies 118 allow the tracking system 100 to determine where a person is physically located within the entire space 102 based on which sensor 108 they appear in and their location within a frame 302 captured by that sensor 108.
  • the server 106 determines coefficients for a homography 118 based on the physical location of markers in the global plane 104 and the pixel locations of the markers in an image from a sensor 108. Examples of the server 106 performing this process are described in FIGS. 2-7.
  • a server 106 is configured to calibrate a shelf position within the global plane 104 using sensors 108. This process allows the tracking system 100 to detect when a rack 112 or sensor 108 has moved from its original location within the space 102. In this configuration, the server 106 periodically compares the current shelf location of a rack 112 to an expected shelf location for the rack 112 using a sensor 108. In the event that the current shelf location does not match the expected shelf location, then the server 106 will use one or more other sensors 108 to determine whether the rack 112 has moved or whether the first sensor 108 has moved. An example of the server 106 performing this process is described in FIGS. 8 and 9.
  • a server 106 is configured to hand off tracking information for an object (e.g. a person) as it moves between the fields of view of adjacent sensors 108. This process allows the tracking system 100 to track people as they move within the interior of the space 102. In this configuration, the server 106 tracks an object’s movement within the field of view of a first sensor 108 and then hands off tracking information (e.g. an object identifier) for the object as it enters the field of view of a second adjacent sensor 108. An example of the server 106 performing this process is described in FIGS. 10 and 11.
  • a server 106 is configured to detect shelf interactions using a virtual curtain. This process allows the tracking system 100 to identify items that a person picks up from a rack 112.
  • the server 106 is configured to process an image captured by a sensor 108 to determine where a person is interacting with a shelf of a rack 112.
  • the server 106 uses a predetermined zone within the image as a virtual curtain that is used to determine which region and which shelf of a rack 112 that a person is interacting with. An example of the server 106 performing this process is described in FIGS. 12-14.
  • a server 106 is configured to detect when an item has been picked up from a rack 112 and to determine which person to assign the item to using a predefined zone that is associated with the rack 112. This process allows the tracking system 100 to associate items on a rack 112 with the person that picked up the item. In this configuration, the server 106 detects that an item has been picked up using a weight sensor 110. The server 106 then uses a sensor 108 to identify a person within a predefined zone that is associated with the rack 112. Once the item and the person have been identified, the server 106 will add the item to a digital cart that is associated with the identified person. An example of the server 106 performing this process is described in FIGS. 15 and 18.
  • a server 106 is configured to identify an object that has a non-uniform weight and to assign the item to a person’s digital cart. This process allows the tracking system 100 to identify items that a person picks up that cannot be identified based on just their weight. For example, the weight of fresh food is not constant and will vary from item to item.
  • the server 106 uses a sensor 108 to identify markers (e.g. text or symbols) on an item that has been picked up. The server 106 uses the identified markers to then identify which item was picked up. The server 106 then uses the sensor 108 to identify a person within a predefined zone that is associated with the rack 112. Once the item and the person have been identified, the server 106 will add the item to a digital cart that is associated with the identified person. An example of the server 106 performing this process is described in FIGS. 16 and 18.
  • a server 106 is configured to identify items that have been misplaced on a rack 112. This process allows the tracking system 100 to remove items from a shopper’s digital cart when the shopper puts down an item regardless of whether they put the item back in its proper location. For example, a person may put back an item in the wrong location on the rack 112 or on the wrong rack 112.
  • the server 106 uses a weight sensor 110 to detect that an item has been put back on rack 112 and to determine that the item is not in the correct location based on its weight.
  • the server 106 uses a sensor 108 to identify the person that put the item on the rack 112 and analyzes their digital cart to determine which item they put back based on the weights of the items in their digital cart. An example of the server 106 performing this process is described in FIGS. 17 and 18.
  • one or more sensors 108 and/or weight sensors 110 are operably coupled to a server 106 via a client 105.
  • the tracking system 100 comprises a plurality of clients 105 that may each be operably coupled to one or more sensors 108 and/or weight sensors 110.
  • first client 105 may be operably coupled to one or more sensors 108 and/or weight sensors 110 and a second client 105 may be operably coupled to one or more other sensors 108 and/or weight sensors 110.
  • a client 105 may be formed by one or more physical devices configured to process data (e.g. frames 302 and/or video) for one or more sensors 108 and/or weight sensors 110.
  • a client 105 may act as an intermediary for exchanging data between a server 106 and one or more sensors 108 and/or weight sensors 110.
  • the combination of one or more clients 105 and a server 106 may also be referred to as a tracking sub system.
  • a client 105 may be configured to provide image processing capabilities for images or frames 302 that are captured by a sensor 108.
  • the client 105 is further configured to send images, processed images, or any other suitable type of data to the server 106 for further processing and analysis.
  • a client 105 may be configured to perform one or more of the processes described above for the server 106.
  • FIG. 2 is a flowchart of an embodiment of a sensor mapping method 200 for the tracking system 100.
  • the tracking system 100 may employ method 200 to generate a homography 118 for a sensor 108.
  • a homography 118 allows the tracking system 100 to determine where a person is physically located within the entire space 102 based on which sensor 108 they appear in and their location within a frame 302 captured by that sensor 108.
  • the homography 118 can be used to translate between pixel locations 402 in images (e.g. frames 302) captured by a sensor 108 and (x,y) coordinates 306 in the global plane 104 (i.e. physical locations in the space 102).
  • the following is a non-limiting example of the process for generating a homography 118 for single sensor 108. This same process can be repeated for generating a homography 118 for other sensors 108.
  • each marker 304 is an object that identifies a known physical location within the space 102.
  • the markers 304 are used to demarcate locations in the physical domain (i.e. the global plane 104) that can be mapped to pixel locations 402 in a frame 302 from a sensor 108.
  • the markers 304 are represented as stars on the floor of the space 102.
  • a marker 304 may be formed of any suitable object that can be observed by a sensor 108.
  • a marker 304 may be tape or a sticker that is placed on the floor of the space 102.
  • a marker 304 may be a design or marking on the floor of the space 102.
  • markers 304 may be positioned in any other suitable location within the space 102 that is observable by a sensor 108.
  • one or more markers 304 may be positioned on top of a rack 112.
  • the (x,y) coordinates 306 for markers 304 are provided by an operator.
  • an operator may manually place markers 304 on the floor of the space 102.
  • the operator may determine an (x,y) location 306 for a marker 304 by measuring the distance between the marker 304 and the reference location 101 for the global plane 104.
  • the operator may then provide the determined (x,y) location 306 to a server 106 or a client 105 of the tracking system 100 as an input.
  • the tracking system 100 may receive a first (x,y) coordinate 306 A for a first marker 304 A in a space 102 and a second (x,y) coordinate 306B for a second marker 304B in the space 102.
  • the first (x,y) coordinate 306A describes the physical location of the first marker 304A with respect to the global plane 104 of the space 102.
  • the second (x,y) coordinate 306B describes the physical location of the second marker 304B with respect to the global plane 104 of the space 102.
  • the tracking system 100 may repeat the process of obtaining (x,y) coordinates 306 for any suitable number of additional markers 304 within the space 102.
  • the tracking system 100 determines where the markers 304 are located with respect to the pixels in the frame 302 of a sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 receives a frame 302 from a sensor 108.
  • the sensor 108 captures an image or frame 302 of the global plane 104 for at least a portion of the space 102.
  • the frame 302 comprises a plurality of markers 304.
  • the tracking system 100 identifies markers 304 within the frame 302 of the sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 uses object detection to identify markers 304 within the frame 302.
  • the markers 304 may have known features (e.g. shape, pattern, color, text, etc.) that the tracking system 100 can search for within the frame 302 to identify a marker 304.
  • each marker 304 has a star shape.
  • the tracking system 100 may search the frame 302 for star shaped objects to identify the markers 304 within the frame 302.
  • the tracking system 100 may identify the first marker 304 A, the second marker 304B, and any other markers 304 within the frame 302.
  • the tracking system 100 may use any other suitable features for identifying markers 304 within the frame 302.
  • the tracking system 100 may employ any other suitable image processing technique for identifying markers 302 with the frame 302.
  • the markers 304 may have a known color or pixel value.
  • the tracking system 100 may use thresholds to identify the markers 304 within frame 302 that correspond with the color or pixel value of the markers 304.
  • the tracking system 100 determines the number of identified markers 304 within the frame 302.
  • tracking system 100 counts the number of markers 304 that were detected within the frame 302.
  • the tracking system 100 detects eight markers 304 within the frame 302.
  • the tracking system 100 determines whether the number of identified markers 304 is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold value.
  • the predetermined threshold value is proportional to a level of accuracy for generating a homography 118 for a sensor 108. Increasing the predetermined threshold value may increase the accuracy when generating a homography 118 while decreasing the predetermined threshold value may decrease the accuracy when generating a homography 118.
  • the predetermined threshold value may be set to a value of six.
  • the tracking system 100 identified eight markers 304 which is greater than the predetermined threshold value.
  • the predetermined threshold value may be set to any other suitable value.
  • the tracking system 100 returns to step 204 in response to determining that the number of identified markers 304 is less than the predetermined threshold value. In this case, the tracking system 100 returns to step 204 to capture another frame 302 of the space 102 using the same sensor 108 to try to detect more markers 304.
  • the tracking system 100 tries to obtain a new frame 302 that includes a number of markers 304 that is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold value.
  • the tracking system 100 may receive new frame 302 of the space 102 after an operator adds one or more additional markers 304 to the space 102.
  • the tracking system 100 may receive new frame 302 after lighting conditions have been changed to improve the detectability of the markers 304 within the frame 302.
  • the tracking system 100 may receive new frame 302 after any kind of change that improves the detectability of the markers 304 within the frame 302.
  • the tracking system 100 proceeds to step 212 in response to determining that the number of identified markers 304 is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold value.
  • the tracking system 100 determines pixel locations 402 in the frame 302 for the identified markers 304. For example, the tracking system 100 determines a first pixel location 402A within the frame 302 that corresponds with the first marker 304 A and a second pixel location 402B within the frame 302 that corresponds with the second marker 304B.
  • the first pixel location 402A comprises a first pixel row and a first pixel column indicating where the first marker 304A is located in the frame 302.
  • the second pixel location 402B comprises a second pixel row and a second pixel column indicating where the second marker 304B is located in the frame 302.
  • the tracking system 100 generates a homography 118 for the sensor 108 based on the pixel locations 402 of identified markers 304 with the frame 302 of the sensor 108 and the (x,y) coordinate 306 of the identified markers 304 in the global plane 104. In one embodiment, the tracking system 100 correlates the pixel location 402 for each of the identified markers 304 with its corresponding (x,y) coordinate 306. Continuing with the example in FIG. 3, the tracking system 100 associates the first pixel location 402 A for the first marker 304 A with the first (x,y) coordinate 306 A for the first marker 304A.
  • the tracking system 100 also associates the second pixel location 402B for the second marker 304B with the second (x,y) coordinate 306B for the second marker 304B.
  • the tracking system 100 may repeat the process of associating pixel locations 402 and (x,y) coordinates 306 for all of the identified markers 304.
  • the tracking system 100 determines a relationship between the pixel locations 402 of identified markers 304 with the frame 302 of the sensor 108 and the (x,y) coordinates 306 of the identified markers 304 in the global plane 104 to generate a homography 118 for the sensor 108.
  • the generated homography 118 allows the tracking system 100 to map pixel locations 402 in a frame 302 from the sensor 108 to (x,y) coordinates 306 in the global plane 104. Additional information about a homography 118 is described in FIGS. 5A and 5B.
  • the tracking system 100 stores an association between the sensor 108 and the generated homography 118 in memory (e.g. memory 3804).
  • the tracking system 100 may repeat the process described above to generate and associate homographies 118 with other sensors 108.
  • the tracking system 100 may receive a second frame 302 from a second sensor 108.
  • the second frame 302 comprises the first marker 304A and the second marker 304B.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine a third pixel location 402 in the second frame 302 for the first marker 304 A, a fourth pixel location 402 in the second frame 302 for the second marker 304B, and pixel locations 402 for any other markers 304.
  • the tracking system 100 may then generate a second homography 118 based on the third pixel location 402 in the second frame 302 for the first marker 304A, the fourth pixel location 402 in the second frame 302 for the second marker 304B, the first (x,y) coordinate 306 A in the global plane 104 for the first marker 304 A, the second (x,y) coordinate 306B in the global plane 104 for the second marker 304B, and pixel locations 402 and (x,y) coordinates 306 for other markers 304.
  • the second homography 118 comprises coefficients that translate between pixel locations 402 in the second frame 302 and physical locations (e.g. (x,y) coordinates 306) in the global plane 104.
  • the coefficients of the second homography 118 are different from the coefficients of the homography 118 that is associated with the first sensor 108. This process uniquely associates each sensor 108 with a corresponding homography 118 that maps pixel locations 402 from the sensor 108 to (x,y) coordinates 306 in the global plane 104.
  • a homography 118 for a sensor 108 is described in FIGS. 5A and 5B.
  • a homography 118 comprises a plurality of coefficients configured to translate between pixel locations 402 in a frame 302 and physical locations (e.g. (x,y) coordinates 306) in the global plane 104.
  • the homography 118 is configured as a matrix and the coefficients of the homography 118 are represented as Hu, H12, H13, H14, H21, H22, H23, H24, H31, H32, H33, H34, H41, H42, H43, and H44.
  • the tracking system 100 may generate the homography 118 by defining a relationship or function between pixel locations 402 in a frame 302 and physical locations (e.g. (x,y) coordinates 306) in the global plane 104 using the coefficients.
  • the tracking system 100 may define one or more functions using the coefficients and may perform a regression (e.g. least squares regression) to solve for values for the coefficients that project pixel locations 402 of a frame 302 of a sensor to (x,y) coordinates 306 in the global plane 104.
  • a regression e.g. least squares regression
  • the homography 118 for the sensor 108 is configured to proj ect the first pixel location 402A in the frame 302 for the first marker 304 A to the first (x,y) coordinate 306 A in the global plane 104 for the first marker 304 A and to project the second pixel location 402B in the frame 302 for the second marker 304B to the second (x,y) coordinate 306B in the global plane 104 for the second marker 304B.
  • the tracking system 100 may solve for coefficients of the homography 118 using any other suitable technique.
  • the z-value at the pixel location 402 may correspond with a pixel value 404.
  • the homography 118 is further configured to translate between pixel values 404 in a frame 302 and z-coordinates (e.g. heights or elevations) in the global plane 104.
  • the tracking system 100 may use the homography 118 to determine the location of an object (e.g. a person) within the space 102 based on the pixel location 402 of the object in a frame 302 of a sensor 108. For example, the tracking system 100 may perform matrix multiplication between a pixel location 402 in a first frame 302 and a homography 118 to determine a corresponding (x,y) coordinate 306 in the global plane 104. For example, the tracking system 100 receives a first frame 302 from a sensor 108 and determines a first pixel location in the frame 302 for an object in the space 102.
  • an object e.g. a person
  • the tracking system 100 may perform matrix multiplication between a pixel location 402 in a first frame 302 and a homography 118 to determine a corresponding (x,y) coordinate 306 in the global plane 104.
  • the tracking system 100 receives a first frame 302 from a sensor 108 and determines a first pixel location in the frame
  • the tracking system 100 may then apply the homography 118 that is associated with the sensor 108 to the first pixel location 402 of the object to determine a first (x,y) coordinate 306 that identifies a first x-value and a first y-value in the global plane 104 where the object is located.
  • the tracking system 100 may use multiple sensors 108 to determine the location of the object. Using multiple sensors 108 may provide more accuracy when determining where an object is located within the space 102. In this case, the tracking system 100 uses homographies 118 that are associated with different sensors 108 to determine the location of an object within the global plane 104. Continuing with the previous example, the tracking system 100 may receive a second frame 302 from a second sensor 108. The tracking system 100 may determine a second pixel location 402 in the second frame 302 for the object in the space 102.
  • the tracking system 100 may then apply a second homography 118 that is associated the second sensor 108 to the second pixel location 402 of the object to determine a second (x,y) coordinate 306 that identifies a second x-value and a second y-value in the global plane 104 where the object is located.
  • the tracking system 100 may use either the first (x,y) coordinate 306 or the second (x,y) coordinate 306 as the physical location of the object within the space 102.
  • the tracking system 100 may employ any suitable clustering technique between the first (x,y) coordinate 306 and the second (x,y) coordinate 306 when the first (x,y) coordinate 306 and the second (x,y) coordinate 306 are not the same.
  • the first (x,y) coordinate 306 and the second (x,y) coordinate 306 are different so the tracking system 100 will need to determine the physical location of the object within the space 102 based off the first (x,y) location 306 and the second (x,y) location 306.
  • the tracking system 100 may generate an average (x,y) coordinate for the object by computing an average between the first (x,y) coordinate 306 and the second (x,y) coordinate 306.
  • the tracking system 100 may generate a median (x,y) coordinate for the object by computing a median between the first (x,y) coordinate 306 and the second (x,y) coordinate 306.
  • the tracking system 100 may employ any other suitable technique to resolve differences between the first (x,y) coordinate 306 and the second (x,y) coordinate 306.
  • the tracking system 100 may use the inverse of the homography 118 to project from (x,y) coordinates 306 in the global plane 104 to pixel locations 402 in a frame 302 of a sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 receives an (x,y) coordinate 306 in the global plane 104 for an object.
  • the tracking system 100 identifies a homography 118 that is associated with a sensor 108 where the object is seen.
  • the tracking system 100 may then apply the inverse homography 118 to the (x,y) coordinate 306 to determine a pixel location 402 where the object is located in the frame 302 for the sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 may compute the matrix inverse of the homograph 500 when the homography 118 is represented as a matrix. Referring to FIG. 5B as an example, the tracking system 100 may perform matrix multiplication between a (x,y) coordinates 306 in the global plane 104 and the inverse homography 118 to determine a corresponding pixel location 402 in the frame 302 for the
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart of an embodiment of a sensor mapping method 600 for the tracking system 100 using a marker grid 702.
  • the tracking system 100 may employ method 600 to reduce the amount of time it takes to generate a homography 118 for a sensor 108.
  • using a marker grid 702 reduces the amount of setup time required to generate a homography 118 for a sensor 108.
  • each marker 304 is placed within a space 102 and the physical location of each marker 304 is determined independently. This process is repeated for each sensor 108 in a sensor array.
  • a marker grid 702 is a portable surface that comprises a plurality of markers 304.
  • the marker grid 702 may be formed using carpet, fabric, poster board, foam board, vinyl, paper, wood, or any other suitable type of material.
  • Each marker 304 is an object that identifies a particular location on the marker grid 702. Examples of markers 304 include, but are not limited to, shapes, symbols, and text.
  • the physical locations of each marker 304 on the marker grid 702 are known and are stored in memory (e.g. marker grid information 716).
  • the homography 118 can be used to translate between pixel locations 402 in frame 302 captured by a sensor 108 and (x,y) coordinates 306 in the global plane 104 (i.e. physical locations in the space 102).
  • the tracking system 100 receives a first (x,y) coordinate 306 A for a first comer 704 of a marker grid 702 in a space 102.
  • the marker grid 702 is configured to be positioned on a surface (e.g. the floor) within the space 102 that is observable by one or more sensors 108.
  • the tracking system 100 receives a first (x,y) coordinate 306 A in the global plane 104 for a first corner 704 of the marker grid 702.
  • the first (x,y) coordinate 306A describes the physical location of the first comer 704 with respect to the global plane 104.
  • the first (x,y) coordinate 306A is based on a physical measurement of a distance between a reference location 101 in the space 102 and the first corner 704.
  • the first (x,y) coordinate 306A for the first comer 704 of the marker grid 702 may be provided by an operator.
  • an operator may manually place the marker grid 702 on the floor of the space 102.
  • the operator may determine an (x,y) location 306 for the first comer 704 of the marker grid 702 by measuring the distance between the first comer 704 of the marker grid 702 and the reference location 101 for the global plane 104.
  • the operator may then provide the determined (x,y) location 306 to a server 106 or a client 105 of the tracking system 100 as an input.
  • the tracking system 100 may receive a signal from a beacon located at the first corner 704 of the marker grid 702 that identifies the first (x,y) coordinate 306A.
  • a beacon includes, but is not limited to, a Bluetooth beacon.
  • the tracking system 100 may communicate with the beacon and determine the first (x,y) coordinate 306A based on the time-of-flight of a signal that is communicated between the tracking system 100 and the beacon.
  • the tracking system 100 may obtain the first (x,y) coordinate 306 A for the first corner 704 using any other suitable technique.
  • the tracking system 100 determines (x,y) coordinates 306 for the markers 304 on the marker grid 702.
  • the tracking system 100 determines a second (x,y) coordinate 306B for a first marker 304A on the marker grid 702.
  • the tracking system 100 comprises marker grid information 716 that identifies offsets between markers 304 on the marker grid 702 and the first comer 704 of the marker grid 702.
  • the offset comprises a distance between the first corner 704 of the marker grid 702 and the first marker 304A with respect to the x-axis and the y-axis of the global plane 104.
  • the tracking system 100 is able to determine the second (x,y) coordinate 306B for the first marker 304 A by adding an offset associated with the first marker 304 A to the first (x,y) coordinate 306 A for the first comer 704 of the marker grid 702.
  • the tracking system 100 determines the second (x,y) coordinate 306B based at least in part on a rotation of the marker grid 702. For example, the tracking system 100 may receive a fourth (x,y) coordinate 306D that identifies x- value and a y-value in the global plane 104 for a second comer 706 of the marker grid 702. The tracking system 100 may obtain the fourth (x,y) coordinate 306D for the second corner 706 of the marker grid 702 using a process similar to the process described in step 602.
  • the tracking system 100 determines a rotation angle 712 between the first (x,y) coordinate 306A for the first corner 704 of the marker grid 702 and the fourth (x,y) coordinate 306D for the second comer 706 of the marker grid 702.
  • the rotation angle 712 is about the first comer 704 of the marker grid 702 within the global plane 104.
  • the tracking system 100 determines the second (x,y) coordinate 306B for the first marker 304A by applying a translation by adding the offset associated with the first marker 304 A to the first (x,y) coordinate 306 A for the first comer 704 of the marker grid 702 and applying a rotation using the rotation angle 712 about the first (x,y) coordinate 306A for the first corner 704 of the marker grid 702.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine the second (x,y) coordinate 306B for the first marker 304 A using any other suitable technique.
  • the tracking system 100 may repeat this process for one or more additional markers 304 on the marker grid 702. For example, the tracking system 100 determines a third (x,y) coordinate 306C for a second marker 304B on the marker grid 702. Here, the tracking system 100 uses the marker grid information 716 to identify an offset associated with the second marker 304A. The tracking system 100 is able to determine the third (x,y) coordinate 306C for the second marker 304B by adding the offset associated with the second marker 304B to the first (x,y) coordinate 306 A for the first comer 704 of the marker grid 702.
  • the tracking system 100 determines a third (x,y) coordinate 306C for a second marker 304B based at least in part on a rotation of the marker grid 702 using a process similar to the process described above for the first marker 304 A.
  • the tracking system 100 determines where the markers 304 are located with respect to the pixels in the frame 302 of a sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 receives a frame 302 from a sensor 108.
  • the frame 302 is of the global plane 104 that includes at least a portion of the marker grid 702 in the space 102.
  • the frame 302 comprises one or more markers 304 of the marker grid 702.
  • the frame 302 is configured similar to the frame 302 described in FIGS. 2-4.
  • the frame 302 comprises a plurality of pixels that are each associated with a pixel location 402 within the frame 302.
  • the pixel location 402 identifies a pixel row and a pixel column where a pixel is located.
  • each pixel is associated with a pixel value 404 that indicates a depth or distance measurement.
  • a pixel value 404 may correspond with a distance between the sensor 108 and a surface within the space 102.
  • the tracking system 100 identifies markers 304 within the frame 302 of the sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 may identify markers 304 within the frame 302 using a process similar to the process described in step 206 of FIG. 2.
  • the tracking system 100 may use object detection to identify markers 304 within the frame 302.
  • each marker 304 is a unique shape or symbol.
  • each marker 304 may have any other unique features (e.g. shape, pattern, color, text, etc.).
  • the tracking system 100 may search for objects within the frame 302 that correspond with the known features of a marker 304. Tracking system 100 may identify the first marker 304A, the second marker 304B, and any other markers 304 on the marker grid 702.
  • the tracking system 100 compares the features of the identified markers 304 to the features of known markers 304 on the marker grid 702 using a marker dictionary 718.
  • the marker dictionary 718 identifies a plurality of markers 304 that are associated with a marker grid 702.
  • the tracking system 100 may identify the first marker 304 A by identifying a star on the marker grid 702, comparing the star to the symbols in the marker dictionary 718, and determining that the star matches one of the symbols in the marker dictionary 718 that corresponds with the first marker 304 A.
  • the tracking system 100 may identify the second marker 304B by identifying a triangle on the marker grid 702, comparing the triangle to the symbols in the marker dictionary 718, and determining that the triangle matches one of the symbols in the marker dictionary 718 that corresponds with the second marker 304B.
  • the tracking system 100 may repeat this process for any other identified markers 304 in the frame 302.
  • the marker grid 702 may comprise markers 304 that contain text.
  • each marker 304 can be uniquely identified based on its text.
  • the tracking system 100 may use a marker dictionary 718 that comprises a plurality of predefined words that are each associated with a marker 304 on the marker grid 702.
  • the tracking system 100 may perform text recognition to identify text with the frame 302.
  • the tracking system 100 may then compare the identified text to words in the marker dictionary 718.
  • the tracking system 100 checks whether the identified text matched any of the known text that corresponds with a marker 304 on the marker grid 702.
  • the tracking system 100 may discard any text that does not match any words in the marker dictionary 718.
  • the tracking system 100 may identify the marker 304 that corresponds with the identified text. For instance, the tracking system 100 may determine that the identified text matches the text associated with the first marker 304 A.
  • the tracking system 100 may identify the second marker 304B and any other markers 304 on the marker grid 702 using a similar process.
  • the tracking system 100 determines a number of identified markers 304 within the frame 302.
  • tracking system 100 counts the number of markers 304 that were detected within the frame 302.
  • the tracking system 100 detects five markers 304 within the frame 302.
  • the tracking system 100 determines whether the number of identified markers 304 is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold value.
  • the tracking system 100 may compare the number of identified markers 304 to the predetermined threshold value using a process similar to the process described in step 210 of FIG. 2.
  • the tracking system 100 returns to step 606 in response to determining that the number of identified markers 304 is less than the predetermined threshold value.
  • the tracking system 100 returns to step 606 to capture another frame 302 of the space 102 using the same sensor 108 to try to detect more markers 304.
  • the tracking system 100 tries to obtain a new frame 302 that includes a number of markers 304 that is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold value.
  • the tracking system 100 may receive new frame 302 of the space 102 after an operator repositions the marker grid 702 within the space 102.
  • the tracking system 100 may receive new frame 302 after lighting conditions have been changed to improve the detectability of the markers 304 within the frame 302.
  • the tracking system 100 may receive new frame 302 after any kind of change that improves the detectability of the markers 304 within the frame 302.
  • the tracking system 100 proceeds to step 614 in response to determining that the number of identified markers 304 is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold value. Once the tracking system 100 identifies a suitable number of markers 304 on the marker grid 702, the tracking system 100 then determines a pixel location 402 for each of the identified markers 304. Each marker 304 may occupy multiple pixels in the frame 302. This means that for each marker 304, the tracking system 100 determines which pixel location 402 in the frame 302 corresponds with its (x,y) coordinate 306 in the global plane 104. In one embodiment, the tracking system 100 using bounding boxes 708 to narrow or restrict the search space when trying to identify pixel location 402 for markers 304.
  • a bounding box 708 is a defined area or region within the frame 302 that contains a marker 304.
  • a bounding box 708 may be defined as a set of pixels or a range of pixels of the frame 302 that comprise a marker 304.
  • the tracking system 100 identifies bounding boxes 708 for markers 304 within the frame 302.
  • the tracking system 100 identifies a plurality of pixels in the frame 302 that correspond with a marker 304 and then defines a bounding box 708 that encloses the pixels corresponding with the marker 304.
  • the tracking system 100 may repeat this process for each of the markers 304.
  • the tracking system 100 may identify a first bounding box 708 A for the first marker 304A, a second bounding box 708B for the second marker 304B, and bounding boxes 708 for any other identified markers 304 within the frame 302.
  • the tracking system may employ text or character recognition to identify the first marker 304A when the first marker 304A comprises text.
  • the tracking system 100 may use text recognition to identify pixels with the frame 302 that comprises a word corresponding with a marker 304. The tracking system 100 may then define a bounding box 708 that encloses the pixels corresponding with the identified word.
  • the tracking system 100 may employ any other suitable image processing technique for identifying bounding boxes 708 for the identified markers 304.
  • each marker 304 may occupy multiple pixels in the frame 302 and the tracking system 100 determines which pixel 710 in the frame 302 corresponds with the pixel location 402 for an (x,y) coordinate 306 in the global plane 104.
  • each marker 304 comprises a light source. Examples of light sources include, but are not limited to, light emitting diodes (LEDs), infrared (IR) LEDs, incandescent lights, or any other suitable type of light source.
  • a pixel 710 corresponds with a light source for a marker 304.
  • each marker 304 may comprise a detectable feature that is unique to each marker 304.
  • each marker 304 may comprise a unique color that is associated with the marker 304.
  • each marker 304 may comprise a unique symbol or pattern that is associated with the marker 304.
  • a pixel 710 corresponds with the detectable feature for the marker 304.
  • the tracking system 100 identifies a first pixel 710A for the first marker 304, a second pixel 710B for the second marker 304, and pixels 710 for any other identified markers 304.
  • the tracking system 100 determines pixel locations 402 within the frame 302 for each of the identified pixels 710. For example, the tracking system 100 may identify a first pixel row and a first pixel column of the frame 302 that corresponds with the first pixel 710A. Similarly, the tracking system 100 may identify a pixel row and a pixel column in the frame 302 for each of the identified pixels 710.
  • the tracking system 100 generates a homography 118 for the sensor 108 after the tracking system 100 determines (x,y) coordinates 306 in the global plane 104 and pixel locations 402 in the frame 302 for each of the identified markers 304.
  • the tracking system 100 generates a homography 118 for the sensor 108 based on the pixel locations 402 of identified markers 304 in the frame 302 of the sensor 108 and the (x,y) coordinate 306 of the identified markers 304 in the global plane 104.
  • the tracking system 100 correlates the pixel location 402 for each of the identified markers 304 with its corresponding (x,y) coordinate 306. Continuing with the example in FIG.
  • the tracking system 100 associates the first pixel location 402 for the first marker 304 A with the second (x,y) coordinate 306B for the first marker 304 A.
  • the tracking system 100 also associates the second pixel location 402 for the second marker 304B with the third (x,y) location 306C for the second marker 304B.
  • the tracking system 100 may repeat this process for all of the identified markers 304.
  • the tracking system 100 determines a relationship between the pixel locations 402 of identified markers 304 with the frame 302 of the sensor 108 and the (x,y) coordinate 306 of the identified markers 304 in the global plane 104 to generate a homography 118 for the sensor 108.
  • the generated homography 118 allows the tracking system 100 to map pixel locations 402 in a frame 302 from the sensor 108 to (x,y) coordinates 306 in the global plane 104.
  • the generated homography 118 is similar to the homography described in FIGS. 5 A and 5B.
  • the tracking system 100 stores an association between the sensor 108 and the generated homography 118 in memory (e.g. memory 3804).
  • the tracking system 100 may repeat the process described above to generate and associate homographies 118 with other sensors 108.
  • the marker grid 702 may be moved or repositioned within the space 108 to generate a homography 118 for another sensor 108.
  • an operator may reposition the marker grid 702 to allow another sensor 108 to view the markers 304 on the marker grid 702.
  • the tracking system 100 may receive a second frame 302 from a second sensor 108.
  • the second frame 302 comprises the first marker 304A and the second marker 304B.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine a third pixel location 402 in the second frame 302 for the first marker 304 A and a fourth pixel location 402 in the second frame 302 for the second marker 304B.
  • the tracking system 100 may then generate a second homography 118 based on the third pixel location 402 in the second frame 302 for the first marker 304 A, the fourth pixel location 402 in the second frame 302 for the second marker 304B, the (x,y) coordinate 306B in the global plane 104 for the first marker 304 A, the (x,y) coordinate 306C in the global plane 104 for the second marker 304B, and pixel locations 402 and (x,y) coordinates 306 for other markers 304.
  • the second homography 118 comprises coefficients that translate between pixel locations 402 in the second frame 302 and physical locations (e.g. (x,y) coordinates 306) in the global plane 104.
  • the coefficients of the second homography 118 are different from the coefficients of the homography 118 that is associated with the first sensor 108.
  • each sensor 108 is uniquely associated with a homography 118 that maps pixel locations 402 from the sensor 108 to physical locations in the global plane 104.
  • This process uniquely associates a homography 118 to a sensor 108 based on the physical location (e.g. (x,y) coordinate 306) of the sensor 108 in the global plane 104.
  • FIG. 8 is a flowchart of an embodiment of a shelf position calibration method 800 for the tracking system 100.
  • the tracking system 100 may employ method 800 to periodically check whether a rack 112 or sensor 108 has moved within the space 102.
  • a rack 112 may be accidently bumped or moved by a person which causes the rack’s 112 position to move with respect to the global plane 104.
  • a sensor 108 may come loose from its mounting structure which causes the sensor 108 to sag or move from its original location. Any changes in the position of a rack 112 and/or a sensor 108 after the tracking system 100 has been calibrated will reduce the accuracy and performance of the tracking system 100 when tracking objects within the space 102.
  • the tracking system 100 employs method 800 to detect when either a rack 112 or a sensor 108 has moved and then recalibrates itself based on the new position of the rack 112 or sensor 108.
  • a sensor 108 may be positioned within the space 102 such that frames 302 captured by the sensor 108 will include one or more shelf markers 906 that are located on a rack 112.
  • a shelf marker 906 is an object that is positioned on a rack 112 that can be used to determine a location (e.g. an (x,y) coordinate 306 and a pixel location 402) for the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 is configured to store the pixel locations 402 and the (x,y) coordinates 306 of the shelf markers 906 that are associated with frames 302 from a sensor 108.
  • the pixel locations 402 and the (x,y) coordinates 306 of the shelf markers 906 may be determined using a process similar to the process described in FIG. 2.
  • the pixel locations 402 and the (x,y) coordinates 306 of the shelf markers 906 may be provided by an operator as an input to the tracking system 100.
  • a shelf marker 906 may be an object similar to the marker 304 described in FIGS. 2-7.
  • each shelf marker 906 on a rack 112 is unique from other shelf markers 906 on the rack 112. This feature allows the tracking system 100 to determine an orientation of the rack 112. Referring to the example in FIG. 9, each shelf marker 906 is a unique shape that identifies a particular portion of the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 may associate a first shelf marker 906 A and a second shelf marker 906B with a front of the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 may also associate a third shelf marker 906C and a fourth shelf marker 906D with a back of the rack 112.
  • each shelf marker 906 may have any other uniquely identifiable features (e.g. color or patterns) that can be used to identify a shelf marker 906.
  • the tracking system 100 receives a first frame 302 A from a first sensor 108.
  • the first sensor 108 captures the first frame 302A which comprises at least a portion of a rack 112 within the global plane 104 for the space 102.
  • the tracking system 100 identifies one or more shelf markers 906 within the first frame 302 A.
  • the rack 112 comprises four shelf markers 906.
  • the tracking system 100 may use object detection to identify shelf markers 906 within the first frame 302 A.
  • the tracking system 100 may search the first frame 302 A for known features (e.g. shapes, patterns, colors, text, etc.) that correspond with a shelf marker 906.
  • the tracking system 100 may identify a shape (e.g. a star) in the first frame 302 A that corresponds with a first shelf marker 906 A.
  • the tracking system 100 may use any other suitable technique to identify a shelf marker 906 within the first frame 302 A.
  • the tracking system 100 may identify any number of shelf markers 906 that are present in the first frame 302 A.
  • the tracking system 100 determines their pixel locations 402 in the first frame 302 A so they can be compared to expected pixel locations 402 for the shelf markers 906.
  • the tracking system 100 determines current pixel locations 402 for the identified shelf markers 906 in the first frame 302 A.
  • the tracking system 100 determines a first current pixel location 402 A for the shelf marker 906 within the first frame 302A.
  • the first current pixel location 402A comprises a first pixel row and first pixel column where the shelf marker 906 is located within the first frame 302 A.
  • the tracking system 100 determines whether the current pixel locations 402 for the shelf markers 906 match the expected pixel locations 402 for the shelf markers 906 in the first frame 302 A.
  • the tracking system 100 determines whether the first current pixel location 402 A matches a first expected pixel location 402 for the shelf marker 906.
  • the tracking system 100 stores pixel location information 908 that comprises expected pixel locations 402 within the first frame 302A of the first sensor 108 for shelf markers 906 of a rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 uses the expected pixel locations 402 as reference points to determine whether the rack 112 has moved. By comparing the expected pixel location 402 for a shelf marker 906 with its current pixel location 402, the tracking system 100 can determine whether there are any discrepancies that would indicate that the rack 112 has moved.
  • the tracking system 100 may terminate method 800 in response to determining that the current pixel locations 402 for the shelf markers 906 in the first frame 302 A match the expected pixel location 402 for the shelf markers 906. In this case, the tracking system 100 determines that neither the rack 112 nor the first sensor 108 has moved since the current pixel locations 402 match the expected pixel locations 402 for the shelf marker 906.
  • the tracking system 100 proceeds to step 810 in response to a determination at step 808 that one or more current pixel locations 402 for the shelf markers 906 does not match an expected pixel location 402 for the shelf markers 906. For example, the tracking system 100 may determine that the first current pixel location 402 A does not match the first expected pixel location 402 for the shelf marker 906. In this case, the tracking system 100 determines that rack 112 and/or the first sensor 108 has moved since the first current pixel location 402A does not match the first expected pixel location 402 for the shelf marker 906. Here, the tracking system 100 proceeds to step 810 to identify whether the rack 112 has moved or the first sensor 108 has moved.
  • the tracking system 100 receives a second frame 302B from a second sensor 108.
  • the second sensor 108 is adjacent to the first sensor 108 and has at least a partially overlapping field of view with the first sensor 108.
  • the first sensor 108 and the second sensor 108 is positioned such that one or more shelf markers 906 are observable by both the first sensor 108 and the second sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 can use a combination of information from the first sensor 108 and the second sensor 108 to determine whether the rack 112 has moved or the first sensor 108 has moved.
  • the second frame 304B comprises the first shelf marker 906A, the second shelf marker 906B, the third shelf marker 906C, and the fourth shelf marker 906D of the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 identifies the shelf markers 906 that are present within the second frame 302B from the second sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 may identify shelf markers 906 using a process similar to the process described in step 804.
  • tracking system 100 may search the second frame 302B for known features (e.g. shapes, patterns, colors, text, etc.) that correspond with a shelf marker 906.
  • the tracking system 100 may identify a shape (e.g. a star) in the second frame 302B that corresponds with the first shelf marker 906 A.
  • the tracking system 100 determines their pixel locations 402 in the second frame 302B so they can be compared to expected pixel locations 402 for the shelf markers 906.
  • the tracking system 100 determines current pixel locations 402 for the identified shelf markers 906 in the second frame 302B.
  • the tracking system 100 determines a second current pixel location 402B for the shelf marker 906 within the second frame 302B.
  • the second current pixel location 402B comprises a second pixel row and a second pixel column where the shelf marker 906 is located within the second frame 302B from the second sensor 108.
  • tracking system 100 determines whether the current pixel locations 402 for the shelf markers 906 match the expected pixel locations 402 for the shelf markers 906 in the second frame 302B.
  • the tracking system 100 determines whether the second current pixel location 402B matches a second expected pixel location 402 for the shelf marker 906.
  • the tracking system 100 stores pixel location information 908 that comprises expected pixel locations 402 within the second frame 302B of the second sensor 108 for shelf markers 906 of a rack 112 when the tracking system 100 is initially calibrated. By comparing the second expected pixel location 402 for the shelf marker 906 to its second current pixel location 402B, the tracking system 100 can determine whether the rack 112 has moved or whether the first sensor 108 has moved.
  • the tracking system 100 determines that the rack 112 has moved when the current pixel location 402 and the expected pixel location 402 for one or more shelf markers 906 do not match for multiple sensors 108.
  • the physical location of the shelf markers 906 moves which causes the pixel locations 402 for the shelf markers 906 to also move with respect to any sensors 108 viewing the shelf markers 906. This means that the tracking system 100 can conclude that the rack 112 has moved when multiple sensors 108 observe a mismatch between current pixel locations 402 and expected pixel locations 402 for one or more shelf markers 906.
  • the tracking system 100 determines that the first sensor 108 has moved when the current pixel location 402 and the expected pixel location 402 for one or more shelf markers 906 do not match only for the first sensor 108. In this case, the first sensor 108 has moved with respect to the rack 112 and its shelf markers 906 which causes the pixel locations 402 for the shelf markers 906 to move with respect to the first sensor 108. The current pixel locations 402 of the shelf markers 906 will still match the expected pixel locations 402 for the shelf markers 906 for other sensors 108 because the position of these sensors 108 and the rack 112 has not changed.
  • the tracking system proceeds to step 818 in response to determining that the current pixel location 402 matches the second expected pixel location 402 for the shelf marker 906 in the second frame 302B for the second sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 determines that the first sensor 108 has moved.
  • the tracking system 100 recalibrates the first sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 recalibrates the first sensor 108 by generating a new homography 118 for the first sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 may generate a new homography 118 for the first sensor 108 using shelf markers 906 and/or other markers 304.
  • the tracking system 100 may generate the new homography 118 for the first sensor 108 using a process similar to the processes described in FIGS. 2 and/or 6.
  • the tracking system 100 may use an existing homography 118 that is currently associated with the first sensor 108 to determine physical locations (e.g. (x,y) coordinates 306) for the shelf markers 906.
  • the tracking system 110 may then use the current pixel locations 402 for the shelf markers 906 with their determined (x,y) coordinates 306 to generate a new homography 118 for first sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 may use an existing homography 118 that is associated with the first sensor 108 to determine a first (x,y) coordinate 306 in the global plane 104 where a first shelf marker 906 is located, a second (x,y) coordinate 306 in the global plane 104 where a second shelf marker 906 is located, and (x,y) coordinates 306 for any other shelf markers 906.
  • the tracking system 100 may apply the existing homography 118 for the first sensor 108 to the current pixel location 402 for the first shelf marker 906 in the first frame 302 A to determine the first (x,y) coordinate 306 for the first marker 906 using a process similar to the process described in FIG. 5A.
  • the tracking system 100 may repeat this process for determining (x,y) coordinates 306 for any other identified shelf markers 906. Once the tracking system 100 determines (x,y) coordinates 306 for the shelf markers 906 and the current pixel locations 402 in the first frame 302 A for the shelf markers 906, the tracking system 100 may then generate a new homography 118 for the first sensor 108 using this information.
  • the tracking system 100 may generate the new homography 118 based on the current pixel location 402 for the first marker 906A, the current pixel location 402 for the second marker 906B, the first (x,y) coordinate 306 for the first marker 906 A, the second (x,y) coordinate 306 for the second marker 906B, and (x,y) coordinates 306 and pixel locations 402 for any other identified shelf markers 906 in the first frame 302 A.
  • the tracking system 100 associates the first sensor 108 with the new homography 118. This process updates the homography 118 that is associated with the first sensor 108 based on the current location of the first sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 may recalibrate the first sensor 108 by updating the stored expected pixel locations for the shelf marker 906 for the first sensor 108. For example, the tracking system 100 may replace the previous expected pixel location 402 for the shelf marker 906 with its current pixel location 402. Updating the expected pixel locations 402 for the shelf markers 906 with respect to the first sensor 108 allows the tracking system 100 to continue to monitor the location of the rack 112 using the first sensor 108. In this case, the tracking system 100 can continue comparing the current pixel locations 402 for the shelf markers 906 in the first frame 302A for the first sensor 108 with the new expected pixel locations 402 in the first frame 302 A.
  • the tracking system 100 sends a notification that indicates that the first sensor 108 has moved.
  • notifications include, but are not limited to, text messages, short message service (SMS) messages, multimedia messaging service (MMS) messages, push notifications, application popup notifications, emails, or any other suitable type of notifications.
  • SMS short message service
  • MMS multimedia messaging service
  • the tracking system 100 may send a notification indicating that the first sensor 108 has moved to a person associated with the space 102. In response to receiving the notification, the person may inspect and/or move the first sensor 108 back to its original location.
  • the tracking system 100 proceeds to step 822 in response to determining that the current pixel location 402 does not match the expected pixel location 402 for the shelf marker 906 in the second frame 302B. In this case, the tracking system 100 determines that the rack 112 has moved.
  • the tracking system 100 updates the expected pixel location information 402 for the first sensor 108 and the second sensor 108. For example, the tracking system 100 may replace the previous expected pixel location 402 for the shelf marker 906 with its current pixel location 402 for both the first sensor 108 and the second sensor 108.
  • Updating the expected pixel locations 402 for the shelf markers 906 with respect to the first sensor 108 and the second sensor 108 allows the tracking system 100 to continue to monitor the location of the rack 112 using the first sensor 108 and the second sensor 108. In this case, the tracking system 100 can continue comparing the current pixel locations 402 for the shelf markers 906 for the first sensor 108 and the second sensor 108 with the new expected pixel locations 402.
  • the tracking system 100 sends a notification that indicates that the rack 112 has moved.
  • the tracking system 100 may send a notification indicating that the rack 112 has moved to a person associated with the space 102.
  • the person may inspect and/or move the rack 112 back to its original location.
  • the tracking system 100 may update the expected pixel locations 402 for the shelf markers 906 again once the rack 112 is moved back to its original location.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart of an embodiment of a tracking hand off method 1000 for the tracking system 100.
  • the tracking system 100 may employ method 1000 to hand off tracking information for an object (e.g. a person) as it moves between the fields of view of adjacent sensors 108.
  • the tracking system 100 may track the position of people (e.g. shoppers) as they move around within the interior of the space 102.
  • Each sensor 108 has a limited field of view which means that each sensor 108 can only track the position of a person within a portion of the space 102.
  • the tracking system 100 employs a plurality of sensors 108 to track the movement of a person within the entire space 102.
  • Each sensor 108 operates independent from one another which means that the tracking system 100 keeps track of a person as they move from the field of view of one sensor 108 into the field of view of an adjacent sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 is configured such that an object identifier 1118 (e.g. a customer identifier) is assigned to each person as they enter the space 102.
  • the object identifier 1118 may be used to identify a person and other information associated with the person. Examples of object identifiers 1118 include, but are not limited to, names, customer identifiers, alphanumeric codes, phone numbers, email addresses, or any other suitable type of identifier for a person or object.
  • the tracking system 100 tracks a person’s movement within the field of view of a first sensor 108 and then hands off tracking information (e.g. an object identifier 1118) for the person as it enters the field of view of a second adjacent sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 comprises adjacency lists 1114 for each sensor 108 that identifies adjacent sensors 108 and the pixels within the frame 302 of the sensor 108 that overlap with the adjacent sensors 108.
  • a first sensor 108 and a second sensor 108 have partially overlapping fields of view. This means that a first frame 302A from the first sensor 108 partially overlaps with a second frame 302B from the second sensor 108.
  • the pixels that overlap between the first frame 302 A and the second frame 302B are referred to as an overlap region 1110.
  • the tracking system 100 comprises a first adjacency list 1114A that identifies pixels in the first frame 302A that correspond with the overlap region 1110 between the first sensor 108 and the second sensor 108.
  • the first adjacency list 1114A may identify a range of pixels in the first frame 302A that correspond with the overlap region 1110.
  • the first adjacency list 114A may further comprise information about other overlap regions between the first sensor 108 and other adjacent sensors 108.
  • a third sensor 108 may be configured to capture a third frame 302 that partially overlaps with the first frame 302A.
  • the first adjacency list 1114A will further comprise information that identifies pixels in the first frame 302A that correspond with an overlap region between the first sensor 108 and the third sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 may further comprise a second adjacency list 1114B that is associated with the second sensor 108.
  • the second adjacency list 1114B identifies pixels in the second frame 302B that correspond with the overlap region 1110 between the first sensor 108 and the second sensor 108.
  • the second adjacency list 1114B may further comprise information about other overlap regions between the second sensor 108 and other adjacent sensors 108.
  • the second tracking list 1112B is shown as a separate data structure from the first tracking list 1112A, however, the tracking system 100 may use a single data structure to store tracking list information that is associated with multiple sensors 108.
  • the tracking system 100 will track the object identifier 1118 associated with the first person 1106 as well as pixel locations 402 in the sensors 108 where the first person 1106 appears in a tracking list 1112.
  • the tracking system 100 may track the people within the field of view of a first sensor 108 using a first tracking list 1112A, the people within the field of view of a second sensor 108 using a second tracking list 1112B, and so on.
  • the first tracking list 1112A comprises object identifiers 1118 for people being tracked using the first sensor 108.
  • the first tracking list 1112A further comprises pixel location information that indicates the location of a person within the first frame 302 A of the first sensor 108.
  • the first tracking list 1112A may further comprise any other suitable information associated with a person being tracked by the first sensor 108.
  • the first tracking list 1112A may identify (x,y) coordinates 306 for the person in the global plane 104, previous pixel locations 402 within the first frame 302A for a person, and/or a travel direction 1116 for a person.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine a travel direction 1116 for the first person 1106 based on their previous pixel locations 402 within the first frame 302A and may store the determined travel direction 1116 in the first tracking list 1112A.
  • the travel direction 1116 may be represented as a vector with respect to the global plane 104. In other embodiments, the travel direction 1116 may be represented using any other suitable format.
  • the tracking system 100 receives a first frame 302 A from a first sensor 108.
  • the first sensor 108 captures an image or frame 302 A of a global plane 104 for at least a portion of the space 102.
  • the first frame 1102 comprises a first object (e.g. a first person 1106) and a second object (e.g. a second person 1108).
  • the first frame 302A captures the first person 1106 and the second person 1108 as they move within the space 102.
  • the tracking system 100 determines a first pixel location 402A in the first frame 302A for the first person 1106.
  • the tracking system 100 determines the current location for the first person 1106 within the first frame 302A from the first sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 identifies the first person 1106 in the first frame 302A and determines a first pixel location 402A that corresponds with the first person 1106.
  • the first person 1106 is represented by a collection of pixels within the frame 302.
  • the first person 1106 is represented by a collection of pixels that show an overhead view of the first person 1106.
  • the tracking system 100 associates a pixel location 402 with the collection of pixels representing the first person 1106 to identify the current location of the first person 1106 within a frame 302.
  • the pixel location 402 of the first person 1106 may correspond with the head of the first person 1106.
  • the pixel location 402 of the first person 1106 may be located at about the center of the collection of pixels that represent the first person 1106.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine a bounding box 708 that encloses the collection of pixels in the first frame 302A that represent the first person 1106.
  • the pixel location 402 of the first person 1106 may located at about the center of the bounding box 708.
  • the tracking system 100 may use object detection or contour detection to identify the first person 1106 within the first frame 302A.
  • the tracking system 100 may identify one or more features for the first person 1106 when they enter the space 102.
  • the tracking system 100 may later compare the features of a person in the first frame 302 A to the features associated with the first person 1106 to determine if the person is the first person 1106.
  • the tracking system 100 may use any other suitable techniques for identifying the first person 1106 within the first frame 302A.
  • the first pixel location 402A comprises a first pixel row and a first pixel column that corresponds with the current location of the first person 1106 within the first frame 302 A.
  • the tracking system 100 determines the object is within the overlap region 1110 between the first sensor 108 and the second sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 may compare the first pixel location 402A for the first person 1106 to the pixels identified in the first adjacency list 1114A that correspond with the overlap region 1110 to determine whether the first person 1106 is within the overlap region 1110.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine that the first object 1106 is within the overlap region 1110 when the first pixel location 402A for the first object 1106 matches or is within a range of pixels identified in the first adjacency list 1114A that corresponds with the overlap region 1110.
  • the tracking system 100 may compare the pixel column of the pixel location 402A with a range of pixel columns associated with the overlap region 1110 and the pixel row of the pixel location 402 A with a range of pixel rows associated with the overlap region 1110 to determine whether the pixel location 402 A is within the overlap region 1110.
  • the pixel location 402A for the first person 1106 is within the overlap region 1110.
  • the tracking system 100 applies a first homography 118 to the first pixel location 402A to determine a first (x,y) coordinate 306 in the global plane 104 for the first person 1106.
  • the first homography 118 is configured to translate between pixel locations 402 in the first frame 302A and (x,y) coordinates 306 in the global plane 104.
  • the first homography 118 is configured similar to the homography 118 described in FIGS. 2-5B.
  • the tracking system 100 may identify the first homography 118 that is associated with the first sensor 108 and may use matrix multiplication between the first homography 118 and the first pixel location 402A to determine the first (x,y) coordinate 306 in the global plane 104.
  • the tracking system 100 identifies an object identifier 1118 for the first person 1106 from the first tracking list 1112A associated with the first sensor 108. For example, the tracking system 100 may identify an object identifier 1118 that is associated with the first person 1106.
  • the tracking system 100 stores the object identifier 1118 for the first person 1106 in a second tracking list 1112B associated with the second sensor 108. Continuing with the previous example, the tracking system 100 may store the object identifier 1118 for the first person 1106 in the second tracking list 1112B. Adding the object identifier 1118 for the first person 1106 to the second tracking list 1112B indicates that the first person 1106 is within the field of view of the second sensor 108 and allows the tracking system 100 to begin tracking the first person 1106 using the second sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 determines where the first person 1106 has entered the field of view of the second sensor 108, the tracking system 100 then determines where the first person 1106 is located in the second frame 302B of the second sensor 108 using a homography 118 that is associated with the second sensor 108. This process identifies the location of the first person 1106 with respect to the second sensor 108 so they can be tracked using the second sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 applies a homography 118 that is associated with the second sensor 108 to the first (x,y) coordinate 306 to determine a second pixel location 402B in the second frame 302B for the first person 1106.
  • the homography 118 is configured to translate between pixel locations 402 in the second frame 302B and (x,y) coordinates 306 in the global plane 104.
  • the homography 118 is configured similar to the homography 118 described in FIGS. 2-5B.
  • the tracking system 100 may identify the homography 118 that is associated with the second sensor 108 and may use matrix multiplication between the inverse of the homography 118 and the first (x,y) coordinate 306 to determine the second pixel location 402B in the second frame 302B.
  • the tracking system 100 stores the second pixel location 402B with the object identifier 1118 for the first person 1106 in the second tracking list 1112B.
  • the tracking system 100 may store additional information associated with the first person 1106 in the second tracking list 1112B.
  • the tracking system 100 may be configured to store a travel direction 1116 or any other suitable type of information associated with the first person 1106 in the second tracking list 1112B.
  • the tracking system 100 may begin tracking the movement of the person within the field of view of the second sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 will continue to track the movement of the first person 1106 to determine when they completely leave the field of view of the first sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 receives a new frame 302 from the first sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 may periodically receive additional frames 302 from the first sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 may receive a new frame 302 from the first sensor 108 every millisecond, every second, every five second, or at any other suitable time interval.
  • the tracking system 100 determines whether the first person 1106 is present in the new frame 302. If the first person 1106 is present in the new frame 302, then this means that the first person 1106 is still within the field of view of the first sensor 108 and the tracking system 100 should continue to track the movement of the first person 1106 using the first sensor 108. If the first person 1106 is not present in the new frame 302, then this means that the first person 1106 has left the field of view of the first sensor 108 and the tracking system 100 no longer needs to track the movement of the first person 1106 using the first sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine whether the first person 1106 is present in the new frame 302 using a process similar to the process described in step 1004. The tracking system 100 returns to step 1018 to receive additional frames 302 from the first sensor 108 in response to determining that the first person 1106 is present in the new frame 1102 from the first sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 proceeds to step 1022 in response to determining that the first person 1106 is not present in the new frame 302. In this case, the first person 1106 has left the field of view for the first sensor 108 and no longer needs to be tracked using the first sensor 108. At step 1022, the tracking system 100 discards information associated with the first person 1106 from the first tracking list 1112A. Once the tracking system 100 determines that the first person has left the field of view of the first sensor 108, then the tracking system 100 can stop tracking the first person 1106 using the first sensor 108 and can free up resources (e.g. memory resources) that were allocated to tracking the first person 1106.
  • resources e.g. memory resources
  • the tracking system 100 will continue to track the movement of the first person 1106 using the second sensor 108 until the first person 1106 leaves the field of view of the second sensor 108.
  • the first person 1106 may leave the space 102 or may transition to the field of view of another sensor 108.
  • FIG. 12 is a flowchart of an embodiment of a shelf interaction detection method 1200 for the tracking system 100.
  • the tracking system 100 may employ method 1200 to determine where a person is interacting with a shelf of a rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 also tracks which items 1306 a person picks up from a rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 identifies and tracks which items 1306 the shopper has picked up, so they can be automatically added to a digital cart 1410 that is associated with the shopper. This process allows items 1306 to be added to the person’s digital cart 1410 without having the shopper scan or otherwise identify the item 1306 they picked up.
  • the digital cart 1410 comprises information about items 1306 the shopper has picked up for purchase.
  • the digital cart 1410 comprises item identifiers and a quantity associated with each item in the digital cart 1410. For example, when the shopper picks up a canned beverage, an item identifier for the beverage is added to their digital cart 1410. The digital cart 1410 will also indicate the number of the beverages that the shopper has picked up. Once the shopper leaves the space 102, the shopper will be automatically charged for the items 1306 in their digital cart 1410.
  • FIG. 13 a side view of a rack 112 is shown from the perspective of a person standing in front of the rack 112.
  • the rack 112 may comprise a plurality of shelves 1302 for holding and displaying items 1306.
  • Each shelf 1302 may be partitioned into one or more zones 1304 for holding different items 1306.
  • the rack 112 comprises a first shelf 1302A at a first height and a second shelf 1302B at a second height.
  • Each shelf 1302 is partitioned into a first zone 1304A and a second zone 1304B.
  • the rack 112 may be configured to carry a different item 1306 (i.e. items 1306A, 1306B, 1306C, and 1036D) within each zone 1304 on each shelf 1302.
  • the rack 112 may be configured to carry up to four different types of items 1306.
  • the rack 112 may comprise any other suitable number of shelves 1302 and/or zones 1304 for holding items 1306.
  • the tracking system 100 may employ method 1200 to identify which item 1306 a person picks up from a rack 112 based on where the person is interacting with the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 receives a frame 302 from a sensor 108.
  • the sensor 108 captures a frame 302 of at least a portion of the rack 112 within the global plane 104 for the space 102.
  • FIG. 14 an overhead view of the rack 112 and two people standing in front of the rack 112 is shown from the perspective of the sensor 108.
  • the frame 302 comprises a plurality of pixels that are each associated with a pixel location 402 for the sensor 108.
  • Each pixel location 402 comprises a pixel row, a pixel column, and a pixel value.
  • the pixel row and the pixel column indicate the location of a pixel within the frame 302 of the sensor 108.
  • the pixel value corresponds with a z-coordinate (e.g. a height) in the global plane 104.
  • the z-coordinate corresponds with a distance between sensor 108 and a surface in the global plane 104.
  • the frame 302 further comprises one or more zones 1404 that are associated with zones 1304 of the rack 112. Each zone 1404 in the frame 302 corresponds with a portion of the rack 112 in the global plane 104.
  • the frame 302 comprises a first zone 1404A and a second zone 1404B that are associated with the rack 112.
  • the first zone 1404A and the second zone 1404B correspond with the first zone 1304 A and the second zone 1304B of the rack 112, respectively.
  • the frame 302 further comprises a predefined zone 1406 that is used as a virtual curtain to detect where a person 1408 is interacting with the rack 112.
  • the predefined zone 1406 is an invisible barrier defined by the tracking system 100 that the person 1408 reaches through to pick up items 1306 from the rack 112.
  • the predefined zone 1406 is located proximate to the one or more zones 1304 of the rack 112.
  • the predefined zone 1406 may be located proximate to the front of the one or more zones 1304 of the rack 112 where the person 1408 would reach to grab for an item 1306 on the rack 112.
  • the predefined zone 1406 may at least partially overlap with the first zone 1404 A and the second zone 1404B.
  • the tracking system 100 identifies an object within a predefined zone 1406 of the frame 1402. For example, the tracking system 100 may detect that the person’s 1408 hand enters the predefined zone 1406. In one embodiment, the tracking system 100 may compare the frame 1402 to a previous frame that was captured by the sensor 108 to detect that the person’s 1408 hand has entered the predefined zone 1406. In this example, the tracking system 100 may use differences between the frames 302 to detect that the person’s 1408 hand enters the predefined zone 1406. In other embodiments, the tracking system 100 may employ any other suitable technique for detecting when the person’s 1408 hand has entered the predefined zone 1406.
  • the tracking system 100 identifies the rack 112 that is proximate to the person 1408.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine a pixel location 402 A in the frame 302 for the person 1408.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine a pixel location 402A for the person 1408 using a process similar to the process described in step 1004 of FIG. 10.
  • the tracking system 100 may use a homography 118 associated with the sensor 108 to determine an (x,y) coordinate 306 in the global plane 104 for the person 1408.
  • the homography 118 is configured to translate between pixel locations 402 in the frame 302 and (x,y) coordinates 306 in the global plane 104.
  • the homography 118 is configured similar to the homography 118 described in FIGS.
  • the tracking system 100 may identify the homography 118 that is associated with the sensor 108 and may use matrix multiplication between the homography 118 and the pixel location 402A of the person 1408 to determine an (x,y) coordinate 306 in the global plane 104. The tracking system 100 may then identify which rack 112 is closest to the person 1408 based on the person’s 1408 (x,y) coordinate 306 in the global plane 104.
  • the tracking system 100 may identify an item map 1308 corresponding with the rack 112 that is closest to the person 1408.
  • the tracking system 100 comprises an item map 1308 that associates items 1306 with particular locations on the rack 112.
  • an item map 1308 may comprise a rack identifier and a plurality of item identifiers. Each item identifier is mapped to a particular location on the rack 112.
  • a first item 1306A is mapped to a first location that identifies the first zone 1304 A and the first shelf 1302 A of the rack 112
  • a second item 1306B is mapped to a second location that identifies the second zone 1304B and the first shelf 1302A of the rack 112
  • a third item 1306C is mapped to a third location that identifies the first zone 1304 A and the second shelf 1302B of the rack 112
  • a fourth item 1306D is mapped to a fourth location that identifies the second zone 1304B and the second shelf 1302B of the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 determines a pixel location 402B in the frame 302 for the object that entered the predefined zone 1406.
  • the pixel location 402B comprises a first pixel row, a first pixel column, and a first pixel value for the person’s 1408 hand.
  • the person’s 1408 hand is represented by a collection of pixels in the predefined zone 1406.
  • the pixel location 402 of the person’s 1408 hand may be located at about the center of the collection of pixels that represent the person’s 1408 hand.
  • the tracking system 100 may use any other suitable technique for identifying the person’s 1408 hand within the frame 302.
  • the tracking system 100 determines which shelf 1302 and zone 1304 of the rack 112 the person 1408 is reaching for.
  • the tracking system 100 determines whether the pixel location 402B for the object (i.e. the person’s 1408 hand) corresponds with a first zone 1304A of the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 uses the pixel location 402B of the person’s 1408 hand to determine which side of the rack 112 the person 1408 is reaching into.
  • the tracking system 100 checks whether the person is reaching for an item on the left side of the rack 112.
  • Each zone 1304 of the rack 112 is associated with a plurality of pixels in the frame 302 that can be used to determine where the person 1408 is reaching based on the pixel location 402B of the person’s 1408 hand.
  • the first zone 1304A of the rack 112 corresponds with the first zone 1404A which is associated with a first range of pixels 1412 in the frame 302.
  • the second zone 1304B of the rack 112 corresponds with the second zone 1404B which is associated with a second range of pixels 1414 in the frame 302.
  • the tracking system 100 may compare the pixel location 402B of the person’s 1408 hand to the first range of pixels 1412 to determine whether the pixel location 402B corresponds with the first zone 1304A of the rack 112.
  • the first range of pixels 1412 corresponds with a range of pixel columns in the frame 302.
  • the first range of pixels 1412 may correspond with a range of pixel rows or a combination of pixel row and columns in the frame 302.
  • the tracking system 100 compares the first pixel column of the pixel location 402B to the first range of pixels 1412 to determine whether the pixel location 1410 corresponds with the first zone 1304A of the rack 112. In other words, the tracking system 100 compares the first pixel column of the pixel location 402B to the first range of pixels 1412 to determine whether the person 1408 is reaching for an item 1306 on the left side of the rack 112. In FIG. 14, the pixel location 402B for the person’s 1408 hand does not correspond with the first zone 1304A of the rack 112. The tracking system 100 proceeds to step 1210 in response to determining that the pixel location 402B for the object corresponds with the first zone 1304A of the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 identifies the first zone 1304 A of the rack 112 based on the pixel location 402B for the object that entered the predefined zone 1406. In this case, the tracking system 100 determines that the person 1408 is reaching for an item on the left side of the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 proceeds to step 1212 in response to determining that the pixel location 402B for the object that entered the predefined zone 1406 does not correspond with the first zone 1304B of the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 identifies the second zone 1304B of the rack 112 based on the pixel location 402B of the object that entered the predefined zone 1406. In this case, the tracking system 100 determines that the person 1408 is reaching for an item on the right side of the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 may compare the pixel location 402B to other ranges of pixels that are associated with other zones 1304 of the rack 112. For example, the tracking system 100 may compare the first pixel column of the pixel location 402B to the second range of pixels 1414 to determine whether the pixel location 402B corresponds with the second zone 1304B of the rack 112. In other words, the tracking system 100 compares the first pixel column of the pixel location 402B to the second range of pixels 1414 to determine whether the person 1408 is reaching for an item 1306 on the right side of the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 determines which shelf 1302 of the rack 112 the person 1408 is reaching into.
  • the tracking system 100 identifies a pixel value at the pixel location 402B for the object that entered the predefined zone 1406.
  • the pixel value is a numeric value that corresponds with a z- coordinate or height in the global plane 104 that can be used to identify which shelf 1302 the person 1408 was interacting with.
  • the pixel value can be used to determine the height the person’s 1408 hand was at when it entered the predefined zone 1406 which can be used to determine which shelf 1302 the person 1408 was reaching into.
  • the tracking system 100 determines whether the pixel value corresponds with the first shelf 1302A of the rack 112.
  • the first shelf 1302 A of the rack 112 corresponds with a first range of z-values or heights 1310A
  • the second shelf 1302B corresponds with a second range of z- values or heights 1310B.
  • the tracking system 100 may compare the pixel value to the first range of z-values 1310A to determine whether the pixel value corresponds with the first shelf 1302A of the rack 112.
  • the first range of z-values 1310A may be a range between 2 meters and 1 meter with respect to the z-axis in the global plane 104.
  • the second range of z-values 1310B may be a range between 0.9 meters and 0 meters with respect to the z-axis in the global plane 104.
  • the pixel value may have a value that corresponds with 1.5 meters with respect to the z-axis in the global plane 104.
  • the pixel value is within the first range of z-values 1310A which indicates that the pixel value corresponds with the first shelf 1302A of the rack 112.
  • the person’s 1408 hand was detected at a height that indicates the person 1408 was reaching for the first shelf 1302A of the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 proceeds to step 1218 in response to determining that the pixel value corresponds with the first shelf of the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 identifies the first shelf 1302 A of the rack 112 based on the pixel value.
  • the tracking system 100 proceeds to step 1220 in response to determining that the pixel value does not correspond with the first shelf 1302A of the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 identifies the second shelf 1302B of the rack 112 based on the pixel value.
  • the tracking system 100 may compare the pixel value to other z-value ranges that are associated with other shelves 1302 of the rack 112. For example, the tracking system 100 may compare the pixel value to the second range of z-values 1310B to determine whether the pixel value corresponds with the second shelf 1302B of the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 determines which side of the rack 112 and which shelf 1302 of the rack 112 the person 1408 is reaching into, then the tracking system 100 can identify an item 1306 that corresponds with the identified location on the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 identifies an item 1306 based on the identified zone 1304 and the identified shelf 1302 of the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 uses the identified zone 1304 and the identified shelf 1302 to identify a corresponding item 1306 in the item map 1308.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine that the person 1408 is reaching into the right side (i.e. zone 1404B) of the rack 112 and the first shelf 1302A of the rack 112. In this example, the tracking system 100 determines that the person 1408 is reaching for and picked up item 1306B from the rack 112.
  • multiple people may be near the rack 112 and the tracking system 100 may need to determine which person is interacting with the rack 112 so that it can add a picked-up item 1306 to the appropriate person’s digital cart 1410.
  • a second person 1420 is also near the rack 112 when the first person 1408 is picking up an item 1306 from the rack 112. In this case, the tracking system 100 should assign any picked-up items to the first person 1408 and not the second person 1420.
  • the tracking system 100 determines which person picked up an item 1306 based on their proximity to the item 1306 that was picked up. For example, the tracking system 100 may determine a pixel location 402A in the frame 302 for the first person 1408. The tracking system 100 may also identify a second pixel location 402C for the second person 1420 in the frame 302. The tracking system 100 may then determine a first distance 1416 between the pixel location 402A of the first person 1408 and the location on the rack 112 where the item 1306 was picked up. The tracking system 100 also determines a second distance 1418 between the pixel location 402C of the second person 1420 and the location on the rack 112 where the item 1306 was picked up.
  • the tracking system 100 may then determine that the first person 1408 is closer to the item 1306 than the second person 1420 when the first distance 1416 is less than the second distance 1418. In this example, the tracking system 100 identifies the first person 1408 as the person that most likely picked up the item 1306 based on their proximity to the location on the rack 112 where the item 1306 was picked up. This process allows the tracking system 100 to identify the correct person that picked up the item 1306 from the rack 112 before adding the item 1306 to their digital cart 1410.
  • the tracking system 100 adds the identified item 1306 to a digital cart 1410 associated with the person 1408.
  • the tracking system 100 uses weight sensors 110 to determine a number of items 1306 that were removed from the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine a weight decrease amount on a weight sensor 110 after the person 1408 removes one or more items 1306 from the weight sensor 110. The tracking system 100 may then determine an item quantity based on the weight decrease amount. For example, the tracking system 100 may determine an individual item weight for the items 1306 that are associated with the weight sensor 110. For instance, the weight sensor 110 may be associated with an item 1306 that that has an individual weight of sixteen ounces. When the weight sensor 110 detects a weight decrease of sixty-four ounces, the weight sensor 110 may determine that four of the items 1306 were removed from the weight sensor 110.
  • the digital cart 1410 may further comprise any other suitable type of information associated with the person 1408 and/or items 1306 that they have picked up.
  • FIG. 15 is a flowchart of an embodiment of an item assigning method 1500 for the tracking system 100.
  • the tracking system 100 may employ method 1500 to detect when an item 1306 has been picked up from a rack 112 and to determine which person to assign the item to using a predefined zone 1808 that is associated with the rack 112.
  • a predefined zone 1808 that can be used to reduce the search space when identifying a person that picks up an item 1306 from a rack 112.
  • the predefined zone 1808 is associated with the rack 112 and is used to identify an area where a person can pick up an item 1306 from the rack 112.
  • the predefined zone 1808 allows the tracking system 100 to quickly ignore people are not within an area where a person can pick up an item 1306 from the rack 112, for example behind the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 will add the item to a digital cart 1410 that is associated with the identified person.
  • the tracking system 100 detects a weight decrease on a weight sensor 110.
  • the weight sensor 110 is disposed on a rack 112 and is configured to measure a weight for the items 1306 that are placed on the weight sensor 110.
  • the weight sensor 110 is associated with a particular item 1306.
  • the tracking system 100 detects a weight decrease on the weight sensor 110 when a person 1802 removes one or more items 1306 from the weight sensor 110.
  • the tracking system 100 identifies an item 1306 associated with the weight sensor 110.
  • the tracking system 100 comprises an item map 1308A that associates items 1306 with particular locations (e.g. zones 1304 and/or shelves 1302) and weight sensors 110 on the rack 112.
  • an item map 1308 A may comprise a rack identifier, weight sensor identifiers, and a plurality of item identifiers. Each item identifier is mapped to a particular weight sensor 110 (i.e. weight sensor identifier) on the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 determines which weight sensor 110 detected a weight decrease and then identifies the item 1306 or item identifier that corresponds with the weight sensor 110 using the item map 1308A.
  • the tracking system 100 receives a frame 302 of the rack 112 from a sensor 108.
  • the sensor 108 captures a frame 302 of at least a portion of the rack 112 within the global plane 104 for the space 102.
  • the frame 302 comprises a plurality of pixels that are each associated with a pixel location 402.
  • Each pixel location 402 comprises a pixel row and a pixel column. The pixel row and the pixel column indicate the location of a pixel within the frame 302.
  • the frame 302 comprises a predefined zone 1808 that is associated with the rack 112.
  • the predefined zone 1808 is used for identifying people that are proximate to the front of the rack 112 and in a suitable position for retrieving items 1306 from the rack 112.
  • the rack 112 comprises a front portion 1810, a first side portion 1812, a second side portion 1814, and a back portion 1814.
  • a person may be able to retrieve items 1306 from the rack 112 when they are either in front or to the side of the rack 112.
  • a person is unable to retrieve items 1306 from the rack 112 when they are behind the rack 112.
  • the predefined zone 1808 may overlap with at least a portion of the front portion 1810, the first side portion 1812, and the second side portion 1814 of the rack 112 in the frame 1806. This configuration prevents people that are behind the rack 112 from being considered as a person who picked up an item 1306 from the rack 112.
  • the predefined zone 1808 is rectangular. In other examples, the predefined zone 1808 may be semi-circular or in any other suitable shape.
  • the tracking system 100 After the tracking system 100 determines that an item 1306 has been picked up from the rack 112, the tracking system 100 then begins to identify people within the frame 302 that may have picked up the item 1306 from the rack 112. At step 1508, the tracking system 100 identifies a person 1802 within the frame 302.
  • the tracking system 100 may identify a person 1802 within the frame 302 using a process similar to the process described in step 1004 of FIG. 10. In other examples, the tracking system 100 may employ any other suitable technique for identifying a person 1802 within the frame 302.
  • the tracking system 100 determines a pixel location 402A in the frame 302 for the identified person 1802.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine a pixel location 402A for the identified person 1802 using a process similar to the process described in step 1004 of FIG. 10.
  • the pixel location 402A comprises a pixel row and a pixel column that identifies the location of the person 1802 in the frame 302 of the sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 applies a homography 118 to the pixel location 402A of the identified person 1802 to determine an (x,y) coordinate 306 in the global plane 104 for the identified person 1802.
  • the homography 118 is configured to translate between pixel locations 402 in the frame 302 and (x,y) coordinates 306 in the global plane 104.
  • the homography 118 is configured similar to the homography 118 described in FIGS. 2-5B.
  • the tracking system 100 may identify the homography 118 that is associated with the sensor 108 and may use matrix multiplication between the homography 118 and the pixel location 402A of the identified person 1802 to determine the (x,y) coordinate 306 in the global plane 104.
  • the tracking system 100 determines whether the identified person 1802 is within a predefined zone 1808 associated with the rack 112 in the frame 302.
  • the predefined zone 1808 is associated with a range of (x,y) coordinates 306 in the global plane 104.
  • the tracking system 100 may compare the (x,y) coordinate 306 for the identified person 1802 to the range of (x,y) coordinates 306 that are associated with the predefined zone 1808 to determine whether the (x,y) coordinate 306 for the identified person 1802 is within the predefined zone 1808.
  • the tracking system 100 uses the (x,y) coordinate 306 for the identified person 1802 to determine whether the identified person 1802 is within an area suitable for picking up items 1306 from the rack 112.
  • the (x,y) coordinate 306 for the person 1802 corresponds with a location in front of the rack 112 and is within the predefined zone 1808 which means that the identified person 1802 is in a suitable area for retrieving items 1306 from the rack 112.
  • the predefined zone 1808 is associated with a plurality of pixels (e.g. a range of pixel rows and pixel columns) in the frame 302.
  • the tracking system 100 may compare the pixel location 402A to the pixels associated with the predefined zone 1808 to determine whether the pixel location 402A is within the predefined zone 1808.
  • the tracking system 100 uses the pixel location 402A of the identified person 1802 to determine whether the identified person 1802 is within an area suitable for picking up items 1306 from the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 may compare the pixel column of the pixel location 402 A with a range of pixel columns associated with the predefined zone 1808 and the pixel row of the pixel location 402A with a range of pixel rows associated with the predefined zone 1808 to determine whether the identified person 1802 is within the predefined zone 1808.
  • the pixel location 402A for the person 1802 is standing in front of the rack 112 and is within the predefined zone 1808 which means that the identified person 1802 is in a suitable area for retrieving items 1306 from the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 proceeds to step 1514 in response to determining that the identified person 1802 is within the predefined zone 1808. Otherwise, the tracking system 100 returns to step 1508 to identify another person within the frame 302. In this case, the tracking system 100 determines the identified person 1802 is not in a suitable area for retrieving items 1306 from the rack 112, for example the identified person 1802 is standing behind of the rack 112. In some instances, multiple people may be near the rack 112 and the tracking system 100 may need to determine which person is interacting with the rack 112 so that it can add a picked-up item 1306 to the appropriate person’s digital cart 1410. Returning to the example in FIG.
  • a second person 1826 is standing next to the side of rack 112 in the frame 302 when the first person 1802 picks up an item 1306 from the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 can ignore the second person 1826 because the pixel location 402B of the second person 1826 is outside of the predetermined zone 1808 that is associated with the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 may identify an (x,y) coordinate 306 in the global plane 104 for the second person 1826 and determine that the second person 1826 is outside of the predefined zone 1808 based on their (x,y) coordinate 306.
  • the tracking system 100 may identify a pixel location 402B within the frame 302 for the second person 1826 and determine that the second person 1826 is outside of the predefined zone 1808 based on their pixel location 402B.
  • the frame 302 further comprises a third person 1832 standing near the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 determines which person picked up the item 1306 based on their proximity to the item 1306 that was picked up. For example, the tracking system 100 may determine an (x,y) coordinate 306 in the global plane 104 for the third person 1832. The tracking system 100 may then determine a first distance 1828 between the (x,y) coordinate 306 of the first person 1802 and the location on the rack 112 where the item 1306 was picked up. The tracking system 100 also determines a second distance 1830 between the (x,y) coordinate 306 of the third person 1832 and the location on the rack 112 where the item 1306 was picked up.
  • the tracking system 100 may then determine that the first person 1802 is closer to the item 1306 than the third person 1832 when the first distance 1828 is less than the second distance 1830. In this example, the tracking system 100 identifies the first person 1802 as the person that most likely picked up the item 1306 based on their proximity to the location on the rack 112 where the item 1306 was picked up. This process allows the tracking system 100 to identify the correct person that picked up the item 1306 from the rack 112 before adding the item 1306 to their digital cart 1410. As another example, the tracking system 100 may determine a pixel location 402C in the frame 302 for a third person 1832.
  • the tracking system 100 may then determine the first distance 1828 between the pixel location 402A of the first person 1802 and the location on the rack 112 where the item 1306 was picked up.
  • the tracking system 100 also determines the second distance 1830 between the pixel location 402C of the third person 1832 and the location on the rack 112 where the item 1306 was picked up.
  • the tracking system 100 adds the item 1306 to a digital cart 1410 that is associated with the identified person 1802.
  • the tracking system 100 may add the item 1306 to the digital cart 1410 using a process similar to the process described in step 1224 of FIG. 12.
  • FIG. 16 is a flowchart of an embodiment of an item identification method 1600 for the tracking system 100.
  • the tracking system 100 may employ method 1600 to identify an item 1306 that has a non-uniform weight and to assign the item 1306 to a person’s digital cart 1410.
  • the tracking system 100 is able to determine the number of items 1306 that are removed from a weight sensor 110 based on a weight difference on the weight sensor 110.
  • items 1306 such as fresh food do not have a uniform weight which means that the tracking system 100 is unable to determine how many items 1306 were removed from a shelf 1302 based on weight measurements.
  • the tracking system 100 uses a sensor 108 to identify markers 1820 (e.g.
  • a marker 1820 may be located on the packaging of an item 1806 or on a strap for carrying the item 1806.
  • the tracking system 100 detects a weight decrease on a weight sensor 110.
  • the weight sensor 110 is disposed on a rack 112 and is configured to measure a weight for the items 1306 that are placed on the weight sensor 110.
  • the weight sensor 110 is associated with a particular item 1306.
  • the tracking system 100 detects a weight decrease on the weight sensor 110 when a person 1802 removes one or more items 1306 from the weight sensor 110.
  • the tracking system 100 After the tracking system 100 detects that an item 1306 was removed from a rack 112, the tracking system 100 will use a sensor 108 to identify the item 1306 that was removed and the person who picked up the item 1306.
  • the tracking system 100 receives a frame 302 from a sensor 108.
  • the sensor 108 captures a frame 302 of at least a portion of the rack 112 within the global plane 104 for the space 102.
  • the sensor 108 is configured such that the frame 302 from the sensor 108 captures an overhead view of the rack 112.
  • the frame 302 comprises a plurality of pixels that are each associated with a pixel location 402.
  • Each pixel location 402 comprises a pixel row and a pixel column. The pixel row and the pixel column indicate the location of a pixel within the frame 302.
  • the frame 302 comprises a predefined zone 1808 that is configured similar to the predefined zone 1808 described in step 1504 of FIG. 15.
  • the frame 1806 may further comprise a second predefined zone that is configured as a virtual curtain similar to the predefined zone 1406 that is described in FIGS. 12-14.
  • the tracking system 100 may use the second predefined zone to detect that the person’s 1802 hand reaches for an item 1306 before detecting the weight decrease on the weight sensor 110.
  • the second predefined zone is used to alert the tracking system 100 that an item 1306 is about to be picked up from the rack 112 which may be used to trigger the sensor 108 to capture a frame 302 that includes the item 1306 being removed from the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 identifies a marker 1820 on an item 1306 within a predefined zone 1808 in the frame 302.
  • a marker 1820 is an object with unique features that can be detected by a sensor 108.
  • a marker 1820 may comprise a uniquely identifiable shape, color, symbol, pattern, text, a barcode, a QR code, or any other suitable type of feature.
  • the tracking system 100 may search the frame 302 for known features that correspond with a marker 1820. Referring to the example in FIG. 18, the tracking system 100 may identify a shape (e.g. a star) on the packaging of the item 1806 in the frame 302 that corresponds with a marker 1820.
  • a shape e.g. a star
  • the tracking system 100 may use character or text recognition to identify alphanumeric text that corresponds with a marker 1820 when the marker 1820 comprises text. In other examples, the tracking system 100 may use any other suitable technique to identify a marker 1820 within the frame 302.
  • the tracking system 100 identifies an item 1306 associated with the marker 1820.
  • the tracking system 100 comprises an item map 1308B that associates items 1306 with particular markers 1820.
  • an item map 1308B may comprise a plurality of item identifiers that are each mapped to a particular marker 1820 (i.e. marker identifier).
  • the tracking system 100 identifies the item 1306 or item identifier that corresponds with the marker 1820 using the item map 1308B.
  • the tracking system 100 may also use information from a weight sensor 110 to identify the item 1306.
  • the tracking system 100 may comprise an item map 1308A that associates items 1306 with particular locations (e.g. zone 1304 and/or shelves 1302) and weight sensors 110 on the rack 112.
  • an item map 1308 A may comprise a rack identifier, weight sensor identifiers, and a plurality of item identifiers. Each item identifier is mapped to a particular weight sensor 110 (i.e. weight sensor identifier) on the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 determines which weight sensor 110 detected a weight decrease and then identifies the item 1306 or item identifier that corresponds with the weight sensor 110 using the item map 1308A.
  • the tracking system 100 After the tracking system 100 identifies the item 1306 that was picked up from the rack 112, the tracking system 100 then determines which person picked up the item 1306 from the rack 112. At step 1610, the tracking system 100 identifies a person 1802 within the frame 302.
  • the tracking system 100 may identify a person 1802 within the frame 302 using a process similar to the process described in step 1004 of FIG. 10. In other examples, the tracking system 100 may employ any other suitable technique for identifying a person 1802 within the frame 302.
  • the tracking system 100 determines a pixel location 402 A for the identified person 1802.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine a pixel location 402A for the identified person 1802 using a process similar to the process described in step 1004 of FIG. 10.
  • the pixel location 402A comprises a pixel row and a pixel column that identifies the location of the person 1802 in the frame 302 of the sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 applies a homography 118 to the pixel location 402A of the identified person 1802 to determine an (x,y) coordinate 306 in the global plane 104 for the identified person 1802.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine the (x,y) coordinate 306 in the global plane 104 for the identified person 1802 using a process similar to the process described in step 1511 of FIG. 15.
  • the tracking system 100 determines whether the identified person 1802 is within the predefined zone 1808.
  • the tracking system 100 determines whether the identified person 1802 is in a suitable area for retrieving items 1306 from the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine whether the identified person 1802 is within the predefined zone 1808 using a process similar to the process described in step 1512 of FIG. 15.
  • the tracking system 100 proceeds to step 1616 in response to determining that the identified person 1802 is within the predefined zone 1808.
  • the tracking system 100 determines the identified person 1802 is in a suitable area for retrieving items 1306 from the rack 112, for example the identified person 1802 is standing in front of the rack 112. Otherwise, the tracking system 100 returns to step 1610 to identify another person within the frame 302.
  • the tracking system 100 determines the identified person 1802 is not in a suitable area for retrieving items 1306 from the rack 112, for example the identified person 1802 is standing behind of the rack 112.
  • multiple people may be near the rack 112 and the tracking system 100 may need to determine which person is interacting with the rack 112 so that it can add a picked-up item 1306 to the appropriate person’s digital cart 1410.
  • the tracking system 100 may identify which person picked up the item 1306 from the rack 112 using a process similar to the process described in step 1512 of FIG. 15.
  • the tracking system 100 adds the item 1306 to a digital cart 1410 that is associated with the person 1802.
  • the tracking system 100 may add the item 1306 to the digital cart 1410 using a process similar to the process described in step 1224 of FIG. 12. Misplaced item identification
  • FIG. 17 is a flowchart of an embodiment of a misplaced item identification method 1700 for the tracking system 100.
  • the tracking system 100 may employ method 1700 to identify items 1306 that have been misplaced on a rack 112. While a person is shopping, the shopper may decide to put down one or more items 1306 that they have previously picked up. In this case, the tracking system 100 should identify which items 1306 were put back on a rack 112 and which shopper put the items 1306 back so that the tracking system 100 can remove the items 1306 from their digital cart 1410. Identifying an item 1306 that was put back on a rack 112 is challenging because the shopper may not put the item 1306 back in its correct location.
  • the shopper may put back an item 1306 in the wrong location on the rack 112 or on the wrong rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 has to correctly identify both the person and the item 1306 so that the shopper is not charged for item 1306 when they leave the space 102.
  • the tracking system 100 uses a weight sensor 110 to first determine that an item 1306 was not put back in its correct location.
  • the tracking system 100 uses a sensor 108 to identify the person that put the item 1306 on the rack 112 and analyzes their digital cart 1410 to determine which item 1306 they most likely put back based on the weights of the items 1306 in their digital cart 1410.
  • the tracking system 100 detects a weight increase on a weight sensor 110.
  • a first person 1802 places one or more items 1306 back on a weight sensor 110 on the rack 112.
  • the weight sensor 110 is configured to measure a weight for the items 1306 that are placed on the weight sensor 110.
  • the tracking system 100 detects a weight increase on the weight sensor 110 when a person 1802 adds one or more items 1306 to the weight sensor 110.
  • the tracking system 100 determines a weight increase amount on the weight sensor 110 in response to detecting the weight increase on the weight sensor 110.
  • the weight increase amount corresponds with a magnitude of the weight change detected by the weight sensor 110.
  • the tracking system 100 determines how much of a weight increase was experienced by the weight sensor 110 after one or more items 1306 were placed on the weight sensor 110.
  • the tracking system 100 determines that the item 1306 placed on the weight sensor 110 is a misplaced item 1306 based on the weight increase amount.
  • the weight sensor 110 may be associated with an item 1306 that has a known individual item weight. This means that the weight sensor 110 is only expected to experience weight changes that are multiples of the known item weight.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine that the returned item 1306 is a misplaced item 1306 when the weight increase amount does not match the individual item weight or multiples of the individual item weight for the item 1306 associated with the weight sensor 110.
  • the weight sensor 110 may be associated with an item 1306 that has an individual weight of ten ounces. If the weight sensor 110 detects a weight increase of twenty-five ounces, the tracking system 100 can determine that the item 1306 placed weight sensor 114 is not an item 1306 that is associated with the weight sensor 110 because the weight increase amount does not match the individual item weight or multiples of the individual item weight for the item 1306 that is associated with the weight sensor 110.
  • the tracking system 100 After the tracking system 100 detects that an item 1306 has been placed back on the rack 112, the tracking system 100 will use a sensor 108 to identify the person that put the item 1306 back on the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 receives a frame 302 from a sensor 108.
  • the sensor 108 captures a frame 302 of at least a portion of the rack 112 within the global plane 104 for the space 102.
  • the sensor 108 is configured such that the frame 302 from the sensor 108 captures an overhead view of the rack 112.
  • the frame 302 comprises a plurality of pixels that are each associated with a pixel location 402.
  • Each pixel location 402 comprises a pixel row and a pixel column.
  • the pixel row and the pixel column indicate the location of a pixel within the frame 302.
  • the frame 302 further comprises a predefined zone 1808 that is configured similar to the predefined zone 1808 described in step 1504 of FIG. 15.
  • the tracking system 100 identifies a person 1802 within the frame 302.
  • the tracking system 100 may identify a person 1802 within the frame 302 using a process similar to the process described in step 1004 of FIG. 10. In other examples, the tracking system 100 may employ any other suitable technique for identifying a person 1802 within the frame 302.
  • the tracking system 100 determines a pixel location 402A in the frame 302 for the identified person 1802.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine a pixel location 402A for the identified person 1802 using a process similar to the process described in step 1004 of FIG. 10.
  • the pixel location 402A comprises a pixel row and a pixel column that identifies the location of the person 1802 in the frame 302 of the sensor 108.
  • the tracking system 100 determines whether the identified person 1802 is within a predefined zone 1808 of the frame 302.
  • the tracking system 100 determines whether the identified person 1802 is in a suitable area for putting items 1306 back on the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine whether the identified person 1802 is within the predefined zone 1808 using a process similar to the process described in step 1512 of FIG. 15.
  • the tracking system 100 proceeds to step 1714 in response to determining that the identified person 1802 is within the predefined zone 1808.
  • the tracking system 100 determines the identified person 1802 is in a suitable area for putting items 1306 back on the rack 112, for example the identified person 1802 is standing in front of the rack 112. Otherwise, the tracking system 100 returns to step 1708 to identify another person within the frame 302.
  • the tracking system 100 determines the identified person is not in a suitable area for retrieving items 1306 from the rack 112, for example the person is standing behind of the rack 112.
  • multiple people may be near the rack 112 and the tracking system 100 may need to determine which person is interacting with the rack 112 so that it can remove the returned item 1306 from the appropriate person’s digital cart 1410.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine which person put back the item 1306 on the rack 112 using a process similar to the process described in step 1512 of FIG. 15.
  • the tracking system 100 After the tracking system 100 identifies which person put back the item 1306 on the rack 112, the tracking system 100 then determines which item 1306 from the identified person’s digital cart 1410 has a weight that closest matches the item 1306 that was put back on the rack 112. At step 1714, the tracking system 100 identifies a plurality of items 1306 in a digital cart 1410 that is associated with the person 1802. Here, the tracking system 100 identifies the digital cart 1410 that is associated with the identified person 1802. For example, the digital cart 1410 may be linked with the identified person’s 1802 object identifier 1118. In one embodiment, the digital cart 1410 comprises item identifiers that are each associated with an individual item weight.
  • the tracking system 100 identifies an item weight for each of the items 1306 in the digital cart 1410.
  • the tracking system 100 may comprises a set of item weights stored in memory and may look up the item weight for each item 1306 using the item identifiers that are associated with the item’s 1306 in the digital cart 1410.
  • the tracking system 100 identifies an item 1306 from the digital cart 1410 with an item weight that closest matches the weight increase amount. For example, the tracking system 100 may compare the weight increase amount measured by the weight sensor 110 to the item weights associated with each of the items 1306 in the digital cart 1410. The tracking system 100 may then identify which item 1306 corresponds with an item weight that closest matches the weight increase amount.
  • the tracking system 100 is unable to identify an item 1306 in the identified person’s digital cart 1410 that a weight that matches the measured weight increase amount on the weight sensor 110.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine a probability that an item 1306 was put down for each of the items 1306 in the digital cart 1410. The probability may be based on the individual item weight and the weight increase amount. For example, an item 1306 with an individual weight that is closer to the weight increase amount will be associated with a higher probability than an item 1306 with an individual weight that is further away from the weight increase amount.
  • the probabilities are a function of the distance between a person and the rack 112.
  • the probabilities associated with items 1306 in a person’s digital cart 1410 depend on how close the person is to the rack 112 where the item 1306 was put back.
  • the probabilities associated with the items 1306 in the digital cart 1410 may be inversely proportional to the distance between the person and the rack 112.
  • the probabilities associated with the items in a person’s digital cart 1410 decay as the person moves further away from the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 may identify the item 1306 that has the highest probability of being the item 1306 that was put down.
  • the tracking system 100 may consider items 1306 that are in multiple people’s digital carts 1410 when there are multiple people within the predefined zone 1808 that is associated with the rack 112. For example, the tracking system 100 may determine a second person is within the predefined zone 1808 that is associated with the rack 112. In this example, the tracking system 100 identifies items 1306 from each person’s digital cart 1410 that may correspond with the item 1306 that was put back on the rack 112 and selects the item 1306 with an item weight that closest matches the item 1306 that was put back on the rack 112. For instance, the tracking system 100 identifies item weights for items 1306 in a second digital cart 1410 that is associated with the second person.
  • the tracking system 100 identifies an item 1306 from the second digital cart 1410 with an item weight that closest matches the weight increase amount.
  • the tracking system 100 determines a first weight difference between a first identified item 1306 from digital cart 1410 of the first person 1802 and the weight increase amount and a second weight difference between a second identified item 1306 from the second digital cart 1410 of the second person.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine that the first weight difference is less than the second weight difference, which indicates that the item 1306 identified in the first person’s digital cart 1410 closest matches the weight increase amount, and then removes the first identified item 1306 from their digital cart 1410.
  • the tracking system 100 After the tracking system 100 identifies the item 1306 that most likely put back on the rack 112 and the person that put the item 1306 back, the tracking system 100 removes the item 1306 from their digital cart 1410. At step 1720, the tracking system 100 removes the identified item 1306 from the identified person’s digital cart 1410. Here, the tracking system 100 discards information associated with the identified item 1306 from the digital cart 1410. This process ensures that the shopper will not be charged for item 1306 that they put back on a rack 112 regardless of whether they put the item 1306 back in its correct location. Auto-exclusion zones
  • the tracking system 100 In order to track the movement of people in the space 102, the tracking system 100 should generally be able to distinguish between the people (i.e., the target objects) and other objects (i.e., non-target objects), such as the racks 112, displays, and any other non-human objects in the space 102. Otherwise, the tracking system 100 may waste memory and processing resources detecting and attempting to track these non-target objects. As described elsewhere in this disclosure (e.g., in FIGS. 24-26 and corresponding description below), in some cases, people may be tracked may be performed by detecting one or more contours in a set of image frames (e.g., a video) and monitoring movements of the contour between frames.
  • a contour is generally a curve associated with an edge of a representation of a person in an image.
  • While the tracking system 100 may detect contours in order to track people, in some instances, it may be difficult to distinguish between contours that correspond to people (e.g., or other target objects) and contours associated with non-target objects, such as racks 112, signs, product displays, and the like.
  • sensors 108 are calibrated at installation to account for the presence of non-target objects, in many cases, it may be challenging to reliably and efficiently recalibrate the sensors 108 to account for changes in positions of non-target objects that should not be tracked in the space 102. For example, if a rack 112, sign, product display, or other furniture or object in space 102 is added, removed, or moved (e.g., all activities which may occur frequently and which may occur without warning and/or unintentionally), one or more of the sensors 108 may require recalibration or adjustment. Without this recalibration or adjustment, it is difficult or impossible to reliably track people in the space 102. Prior to this disclosure, there was a lack of tools for efficiently recalibrating and/or adjusting sensors, such as sensors 108, in a manner that would provide reliable tracking.
  • pixel regions from each sensor 108 may be determined that should be excluded during subsequent tracking.
  • the space 102 may not include any people such that contours detected by each sensor 108 correspond only to non-target objects in the space for which tracking is not desired.
  • pixel regions, or “auto-exclusion zones,” corresponding to portions of each image generated by sensors 108 that are not used for object detection and tracking e.g., the pixel coordinates of contours that should not be tracked.
  • the auto-exclusion zones may correspond to contours detected in images that are associated with non-target objects, contours that are spuriously detected at the edges of a sensor’s field-of-view, and the like). Auto-exclusion zones can be determined automatically at any desired or appropriate time interval to improve the usability and performance of tracking system 100
  • the tracking system 100 may proceed to track people in the space 102.
  • the auto-exclusion zones are used to limit the pixel regions used by each sensor 108 for tracking people. For example, pixels corresponding to auto-exclusion zones may be ignored by the tracking system 100 during tracking.
  • a detected person e.g., or other target object
  • the tracking system 100 may determine, based on the extent to which a potential target object’s position overlaps with the auto-exclusion zone, whether the target object will be tracked.
  • a map of the space 102 may be generated that presents the physical regions that are excluded during tracking (i.e., a map that presents a representation of the auto-exclusion zone(s) in the physical coordinates of the space). Such a map, for example, may facilitate trouble-shooting of the tracking system by allowing an administrator to visually confirm that people can be tracked in appropriate portions of the space 102.
  • FIG. 19 illustrates the determination of auto-exclusion zones 1910, 1914 and the subsequent use of these auto-exclusion zones 1910, 1914 for improved tracking of people (e.g., or other target objects) in the space 102.
  • top-view image frames are received by the client(s) 105 and/or server 106 from sensors 108 and used to determine auto-exclusion zones 1910, 1914.
  • the initial time period at t ⁇ to may correspond to a time when no people are in the space 102. For example, if the space 102 is open to the public during a portion of the day, the initial time period may be before the space 102 is opened to the public.
  • the server 106 and/or client 105 may provide, for example, an alert or transmit a signal indicating that the space 102 should be emptied of people (e.g., or other target objects to be tracked) in order for auto-exclusion zones 1910, 1914 to be identified.
  • a user may input a command (e.g., via any appropriate interface coupled to the server 106 and/or client(s) 105) to initiate the determination of auto-exclusion zones 1910, 1914 immediately or at one or more desired times in the future (e.g., based on a schedule).
  • Image frame 1902 includes a representation of a first object 1904 (e.g., a rack 112) and a representation of a second object 1906.
  • first object 1904 may be a rack 112
  • second object 1906 may be a product display or any other non-target object in the space 102.
  • the second object 1906 may not correspond to an actual object in the space but may instead be detected anomalously because of lighting in the space 102 and/or a sensor error.
  • Each sensor 108 generally generates at least one frame 1902 during the initial time period, and these frame(s) 1902 is/are used to determine corresponding auto exclusion zones 1910, 1914 for the sensor 108.
  • the sensor client 105 may receive the top-view image 1902, and detect contours (i.e., the dashed lines around zones 1910, 1914) corresponding to the auto-exclusion zones 1910, 1914 as illustrated in view 1908.
  • the contours of auto-exclusion zones 1910, 1914 generally correspond to curves that extend along a boundary (e.g., the edge) of objects 1904, 1906 in image 1902.
  • the view 1908 generally corresponds to a presentation of image 1902 in which the detected contours corresponding to auto-exclusion zones 1910, 1914 are presented but the corresponding objects 1904, 1906, respectively, are not shown.
  • contours for auto-exclusion zones 1910, 1914 may be determined at a given depth (e.g., a distance away from sensor 108) based on the color data in the image 1902. For example, a steep gradient of a color value may correspond to an edge of an object and used to determine, or detect, a contour.
  • contours for the auto-exclusion zones 1910, 1914 may be determined using any suitable contour or edge detection method such as Canny edge detection, threshold- based detection, or the like.
  • the client 105 determines pixel coordinates 1912 and 1916 corresponding to the locations of the auto-exclusions zones 1910 and 1914, respectively.
  • the pixel coordinates 1912, 1916 generally correspond to the locations (e.g., row and column numbers) in the image frame 1902 that should be excluded during tracking.
  • objects associated with the pixel coordinates 1912, 1916 are not tracked by the tracking system 100.
  • certain objects which are detected outside of the auto-exclusion zones 1910, 1914 may not be tracked under certain conditions. For instance, if the position of the object (e.g., the position associated with region 1920, discussed below with respect to view 1914) overlaps at least a threshold amount with an auto-exclusion zone 1910, 1914, the object may not be tracked.
  • auto exclusion zones 1910, 1914 correspond to non-target (e.g., inanimate) objects in the field-of-view of a sensor 108 (e.g., a rack 112, which is associated with contour 1910).
  • auto-exclusion zones 1910, 1914 may also or alternatively correspond to other aberrant features or contours detected by a sensor 108 (e.g., caused by sensor errors, inconsistent lighting, or the like).
  • region 1920 is detected as possibly corresponding to what may or may not be a target object.
  • region 1920 may correspond to a pixel mask or bounding box generated based on a contour detected in frame 1902.
  • a pixel mask may be generated to fill in the area inside the contour or a bounding box may be generated to encompass the contour.
  • a pixel mask may include the pixel coordinates within the corresponding contour.
  • the pixel coordinates 1912 of auto-exclusion zone 1910 may effectively correspond to a mask that overlays or “fills in” the auto-exclusion zone 1910.
  • the client 105 determines whether the region 1920 corresponds to a target object which should tracked or is sufficiently overlapping with auto-exclusion zone 1914 to consider region 1920 as being associated with a non-target object.
  • the client 105 may determine whether at least a threshold percentage of the pixel coordinates 1916 overlap with (e.g., are the same as) pixel coordinates of region 1920.
  • the overlapping region 1922 of these pixel coordinates is illustrated in frame 1918.
  • the threshold percentage may be about 50% or more. In some embodiments, the threshold percentage may be as small as about 10%.
  • the client 105 In response to determining that at least the threshold percentage of pixel coordinates overlap, the client 105 generally does not determine a pixel position for tracking the object associated with region 1920. However, if overlap 1922 correspond to less than the threshold percentage, an object associated with region 1920 is tracked, as described further below (e.g., with respect to FIGS. 24-26).
  • sensors 108 may be arranged such that adjacent sensors 108 have overlapping fields-of-view. For instance, fields-of-view of adjacent sensors 108 may overlap by between about 10% to 30%. As such, the same object may be detected by two different sensors 108 and either included or excluded from tracking in the image frames received from each sensor 108 based on the unique auto-exclusion zones determined for each sensor 108. This may facilitate more reliable tracking than was previously possible, even when one sensor 108 may have a large auto-exclusion zone (i.e., where a large proportion of pixel coordinates in image frames generated by the sensor 108 are excluded from tracking). Accordingly, if one sensor 108 malfunctions, adjacent sensors 108 may still provide adequate tracking in the space 102
  • the tracking system 100 proceeds to track the region 1920.
  • Example methods of tracking are described in greater detail below with respect to FIGS. 24-26.
  • the server 106 uses the pixel coordinates 1912, 1916 to determine corresponding physical coordinates (e.g., coordinates 2012, 2016 illustrated in FIG. 20, described below).
  • the client 105 may determine pixel coordinates 1912, 1916 corresponding to the local auto-exclusion zones 1910, 1914 of a sensor 108 and transmit these coordinates 1912, 1916 to the server 106.
  • the server 106 may use the pixel coordinates 1912, 1916 received from the sensor 108 to determine corresponding physical coordinates 2010, 2016.
  • a homography generated for each sensor 108 which associates pixel coordinates (e.g., coordinates 1912, 1916) in an image generated by a given sensor 108 to corresponding physical coordinates (e.g., coordinates 2012, 2016) in the space 102, may be employed to convert the excluded pixel coordinates 1912, 1916 (of FIG. 19) to excluded physical coordinates 2012, 2016 in the space 102.
  • These excluded coordinates 2010, 2016 may be used along with other coordinates from other sensors 108 to generate the global auto-exclusion zone map 2000 of the space 102 which is illustrated in FIG. 20.
  • This map 2000 may facilitate trouble shooting of the tracking system 100 by facilitating quantification, identification, and/or verification of physical regions 2002 of space 102 where objects may (and may not) be tracked. This may allow an administrator or other individual to visually confirm that objects can be tracked in appropriate portions of the space 102). If regions 2002 correspond to known high-traffic zones of the space 102, system maintenance may be appropriate (e.g., which may involve replacing, adjusting, and/or adding additional sensors 108).
  • FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example method 2100 for generating and using auto-exclusion zones (e.g., zones 1910, 1914 of FIG. 19).
  • Method 2100 may begin at step 2102 where one or more image frames 1902 are received during an initial time period.
  • the initial time period may correspond to an interval of time when no person is moving throughout the space 102, or when no person is within the field-of-view of one or more sensors 108 from which the image frame(s) 1902 is/are received.
  • one or more image frames 1902 are generally received from each sensor 108 of the tracking system 100, such that local regions (e.g., auto-exclusion zones 1910, 1914) to exclude for each sensor 108 may be determined.
  • a single image frame 1902 is received from each sensor 108 to detect auto-exclusion zones 1910, 1914.
  • multiple image frames 1902 are received from each sensor 108. Using multiple image frames 1902 to identify auto-exclusions zones 1910, 1914 for each sensor 108 may improve the detection of any spurious contours or other aberrations that correspond to pixel coordinates (e.g., coordinates 1912, 1916 of FIG. 19) which should be ignored or excluded during tracking.
  • contours e.g., dashed contour lines corresponding to auto exclusion zones 1910, 1914 of FIG. 19
  • Any appropriate contour detection algorithm may be used including but not limited to those based on Canny edge detection, threshold-based detection, and the like.
  • the unique contour detection approaches described in this disclosure may be used (e.g., to distinguish closely spaced contours in the field-of-view, as described below, for example, with respect to FIGS. 22 and 23).
  • pixel coordinates e.g., coordinates 1912, 1916 of FIG. 19 are determined for the detected contours (from step 2104).
  • the coordinates may be determined, for example, based on a pixel mask that overlays the detected contours.
  • a pixel mask may for example, correspond to pixels within the contours.
  • pixel coordinates correspond to the pixel coordinates within a bounding box determined for the contour (e.g., as illustrated in FIG. 22, described below).
  • the bounding box may be a rectangular box with an area that encompasses the detected contour.
  • the pixel coordinates are stored.
  • the client 105 may store the pixel coordinates corresponding to auto-exclusion zones 1910, 1914 in memory (e.g., memory 3804 of FIG. 38, described below).
  • the pixel coordinates may also or alternatively be transmitted to the server 106 (e.g., to generate a map 2000 of the space, as illustrated in the example of FIG. 20).
  • the client 105 receives an image frame 1918 during a subsequent time during which tracking is performed (i.e., after the pixel coordinates corresponding to auto-exclusion zones are stored at step 2108).
  • the frame is received from sensor 108 and includes a representation of an object in the space 102.
  • a contour is detected in the frame received at step 2110.
  • the contour may correspond to a curve along the edge of object represented in the frame 1902.
  • the pixel coordinates determined at step 2106 may be excluded (or not used) during contour detection. For instance, image data may be ignored and/or removed (e.g., given a value of zero, or the color equivalent) at the pixel coordinates determined at step 2106, such that no contours are detected at these coordinates.
  • a contour may be detected outside of these coordinates.
  • a contour may be detected that is partially outside of these coordinates but overlaps partially with the coordinates (e.g., as illustrated in image 1918 of FIG. 19).
  • the client 105 generally determines whether the detected contour has a pixel position that sufficiently overlaps with pixel coordinates of the auto exclusion zones 1910, 1914 determined at step 2106. If the coordinates sufficiently overlap, the contour or region 1920 (i.e., and the associated object) is not tracked in the frame. For instance, as described above, the client 105 may determine whether the detected contour or region 1920 overlaps at least a threshold percentage (e.g., of 50%) with a region associated with the pixel coordinates (e.g., see overlapping region 1922 of FIG. 19). If the criteria of step 2114 are satisfied, the client 105 generally, at step 2116, does not determine a pixel position for the contour detected at step 2112. As such, no pixel position is reported to the server 106, thereby reducing or eliminating the waste of processing resources associated with attempting to track an object when it is not a target object for which tracking is desired.
  • a threshold percentage e.g. 50%
  • the client 105 determines a pixel position for the contour or region 1920 at step 2118. Determining a pixel position from a contour may involve, for example, (i) determining a region 1920 (e.g., a pixel mask or bounding box) associated with the contour and (ii) determining a centroid or other characteristic position of the region as the pixel position.
  • the determined pixel position is transmitted to the server 106 to facilitate global tracking, for example, using predetermined homographies, as described elsewhere in this disclosure (e.g., with respect to FIGS. 24-26).
  • the server 106 may receive the determined pixel position, access a homography associating pixel coordinates in images generated by the sensor 108 from which the frame at step 2110 was received to physical coordinates in the space 102, and apply the homography to the pixel coordinates to generate corresponding physical coordinates for the tracked object associated with the contour detected at step 2112. Modifications, additions, or omissions may be made to method 2100 depicted in FIG. 21. Method 2100 may include more, fewer, or other steps. For example, steps may be performed in parallel or in any suitable order. While at times discussed as tracking system 100, client(s) 105, server 106, or components of any of thereof performing steps, any suitable system or components of the system may perform one or more steps of the method.
  • the people may be initially detected and tracked using depth images at an approximate waist depth (i.e., a depth corresponding to the waist height of an average person being tracked). Tracking at an approximate waist depth may be more effective at capturing all people regardless of their height or mode of movement. For instance, by detecting and tacking people at an approximate waist depth, the tracking system 100 is highly likely to detect tall and short individuals and individuals who may be using alternative methods of movement (e.g., wheelchairs, and the like).
  • the tracking system 100 may initially detect the people as a single larger object.
  • This disclosure encompasses the recognition that at a decreased depth (i.e., a depth nearer the heads of the people), the people may be more readily distinguished. This is because the people’s heads are more likely to be imaged at the decreased depth, and their heads are smaller and less likely to be detected as a single merged region (or contour, as described in greater detail below).
  • a decreased depth i.e., a depth nearer the heads of the people
  • the people may be more readily distinguished. This is because the people’s heads are more likely to be imaged at the decreased depth, and their heads are smaller and less likely to be detected as a single merged region (or contour, as described in greater detail below).
  • two people enter the space 102 standing close to one another (e.g., holding hands), they may appear to be a single larger object. Since the tracking system 100 may initially detect the two people as one person, it may be difficult to properly identify these people if these people separate while in the space 102.
  • two people who briefly stand close together are momentarily “lost
  • people e.g., the people in the example scenarios described above
  • people may be tracked by detecting contours in top-view image frames generated by sensors 108 and tracking the positions of these contours.
  • a single merged contour may be detected in a top-view image of the people.
  • This single contour generally cannot be used to track each person individually, resulting in considerable downstream errors during tracking. For example, even if two people separate after having been closely spaced, it may be difficult or impossible using previous tools to determine which person was which, and the identity of each person may be unknown after the two people separate.
  • improved contour detection is achieved by detecting contours at different depths (e.g., at least two depths) to identify separate contours at a second depth within a larger merged contour detected at a first depth used for tracking. For example, if two people are standing near each other such that contours are merged to form a single contour, separate contours associated with heads of the two closely spaced people may be detected at a depth associated with the persons’ heads.
  • depths e.g., at least two depths
  • a unique statistical approach may be used to differentiate between the two people by selecting bounding regions for the detected contours with a low similarity value.
  • certain criteria are satisfied to ensure that the detected contours correspond to separate people, thereby providing more reliable person (e.g., or other target object) detection than was previously possible.
  • two contours detected at an approximate head depth may be required to be within a threshold size range in order for the contours to be used for subsequent tracking.
  • an artificial neural network may be employed to detect separate people that are closely spaced by analyzing top-view images at different depths.
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating the detection of two closely spaced people 2202, 2204 based on top-view depth images 2212 and angled-view images 2214 received from sensors 108a,b using the tracking system 100.
  • sensors 108a,b may each be one of sensors 108 of tracking system 100 described above with respect to FIG. 1.
  • sensors 108a,b may each be one of sensors 108 of a separate virtual store system (e.g, layout cameras and/or rack cameras) as described in U.S. Patent Application No. 16/664,470 entitled, “Customer-Based Video Feed” (attorney docket no. 090278.0187) which is incorporated by reference herein.
  • the sensors 108 of tracking system 100 may be mapped to the sensors 108 of the virtual store system using a homography. Moreover, this embodiment can retrieve identifiers and the relative position of each person from the sensors 108 of the virtual store system using the homography between tracking system 100 and the virtual store system.
  • sensor 108a is an overhead sensor configured to generate top-view depth images 2212 (e.g., color and/or depth images) of at least a portion of the space 102.
  • Sensor 108a may be mounted, for example, in a ceiling of the space 102.
  • Sensor 108a may generate image data corresponding to a plurality of depths which include but are not necessarily limited to the depths 2210a-c illustrated in FIG. 22.
  • Depths 2210a-c are generally distances measured from the sensor 108a. Each depth 2210a-c may be associated with a corresponding height (e.g., from the floor of the space 102 in which people 2202, 2204 are detected and/or tracked). Sensor 108a observes a field-of-view 2208a. Top-view images 2212 generated by sensor 108a may be transmitted to the sensor client 105a.
  • the sensor client 105a is communicatively coupled (e.g., via wired connection of wirelessly) to the sensor 108a and the server 106.
  • Server 106 is described above with respect to FIG. 1.
  • sensor 108b is an angled-view sensor, which is configured to generate angled-view images 2214 (e.g., color and/or depth images) of at least a portion of the space 102.
  • Sensor 108b has a field of view 2208b, which overlaps with at least a portion of the field-of-view 2208a of sensor 108a.
  • the angled-view images 2214 generated by the angled-view sensor 108b are transmitted to sensor client 105b.
  • Sensor client 105b may be a client 105 described above with respect to FIG. 1.
  • sensors 108a, b are coupled to different sensor clients 105a, b.
  • the same sensor client 105 may be used for both sensors 108a, b (e.g., such that clients 105a, b are the same client 105).
  • the use of different sensor clients 105a,b for sensors 108a,b may provide improved performance because image data may still be obtained for the area shared by fields-of- view 2208a, b even if one of the clients 105a, b were to fail.
  • people 2202, 2204 are located sufficiently close together such that conventional object detection tools fail to detect the individual people 2202, 2204 (e.g., such that people 2202, 2204 would not have been detected as separate objects).
  • This situation may correspond, for example, to the distance 2206a between people 2202, 2204 being less than a threshold distance 2206b (e.g., of about 6 inches).
  • the threshold distance 2206b can generally be any appropriate distance determined for the system 100.
  • the threshold distance 2206b may be determined based on several characteristics of the system 2200 and the people 2202, 2204 being detected.
  • the threshold distance 2206b may be based on one or more of the distance of the sensor 108a from the people 2202, 2204, the size of the people 2202, 2204, the size of the field-of-view 2208a, the sensitivity of the sensor 108a, and the like. Accordingly, the threshold distance 2206b may range from just over zero inches to over six inches depending on these and other characteristics of the tracking system 100. People 2202, 2204 may be any target object an individual may desire to detect and/or track based on data (i.e., top-view images 2212 and/or angled- view images 2214) from sensors 108a,b.
  • data i.e., top-view images 2212 and/or angled- view images 2214
  • the sensor client 105a detects contours in top-view images 2212 received from sensor 108a. Typically, the sensor client 105a detects contours at an initial depth 2210a.
  • the initial depth 2210a may be associated with, for example, a predetermined height (e.g., from the ground) which has been established to detect and/or track people 2202, 2204 through the space 102.
  • the initial depth 2210a may be associated with an average shoulder or waist height of people expected to be moving in the space 102 (e.g., a depth which is likely to capture a representation for both tall and short people traversing the space 102).
  • the sensor client 105a may use the top-view images 2212 generated by sensor 108a to identify the top-view image 2212 corresponding to when a first contour 2202a associated with the first person 2202 merges with a second contour 2204a associated with the second person 2204.
  • View 2216 illustrates contours 2202a, 2204a at a time prior to when these contours 2202a, 2204a merge (i.e., prior to a time (tciose) when the first and second people 2202, 2204 are within the threshold distance 2206b of each other).
  • View 2216 corresponds to a view of the contours detected in a top-view image 2212 received from sensor 108a (e.g., with other objects in the image not shown).
  • a subsequent view 2218 corresponds to the image 2212 at or near t ci0S e when the people 2202, 2204 are closely spaced and the first and second contours 2202a, 2204a merge to form merged contour 2220.
  • the sensor client 105a may determine a region 2222 which corresponds to a “size” of the merged contour 2220 in image coordinates (e.g., a number of pixels associated with contour 2220).
  • region 2222 may correspond to a pixel mask or a bounding box determined for contour 2220. Example approaches to determining pixel masks and bounding boxes are described above with respect to step 2104 of FIG 21.
  • region 2222 may be a bounding box determined for the contour 2220 using a non-maximum suppression object-detection algorithm.
  • the sensor client 105a may determine a plurality of bounding boxes associated with the contour 2220. For each bounding box, the client 105a may calculate a score. The score, for example, may represent an extent to which that bounding box is similar to the other bounding boxes.
  • the sensor client 105a may identify a subset of the bounding boxes with a score that is greater than a threshold value (e.g., 80% or more), and determine region 2222 based on this identified subset.
  • region 2222 may be the bounding box with the highest score or a bounding comprising regions shared by bounding boxes with a score that is above the threshold value.
  • the sensor client 105a may access images 2212at a decreased depth (i.e., at one or both of depths 2212b and 2212c) and use this data to detect separate contours 2202b, 2204b, illustrated in view 2224.
  • the sensor client 105a may analyze the images 2212 at a depth nearer the heads of people 2202, 2204 in the images 2212 in order to detect the separate people 2202, 2204.
  • the decreased depth may correspond to an average or predetermined head height of persons expected to be detected by the tracking system 100 in the space 102.
  • contours 2202b, 2204b may be detected at the decreased depth for both people 2202, 2204.
  • the sensor client 105a may not detect both heads at the decreased depth. For example, if a child and an adult are closely spaced, only the adult’s head may be detected at the decreased depth (e.g., at depth 2210b). In this scenario, the sensor client 105a may proceed to a slightly increased depth (e.g., to depth 2210c) to detect the head of the child. For instance, in such scenarios, the sensor client 105a iteratively increases the depth from the decreased depth towards the initial depth 2210a in order to detect two distinct contours 2202b, 2204b (e.g., for both the adult and the child in the example described above).
  • the depth may first be decreased to depth 2210b and then increased to depth 2210c if both contours 2202b and 2204b are not detected at depth 2210b. This iterative process is described in greater detail below with respect to method 2300 of FIG. 23.
  • the tracking system 100 may maintain a record of features, or descriptors, associated with each tracked person (see, e.g., FIG. 30, described below). As such, the sensor client 105a may access this record to determine unique depths that are associated with the people 2202, 2204, which are likely associated with merged contour 2220. For instance, depth 2210b may be associated with a known head height of person 2202, and depth 2212c may be associated with a known head height of person 2204.
  • the sensor client determines a region 2202c associated with pixel coordinates 2202d of contour 2202b and a region 2204c associated with pixel coordinates 2204d of contour 2204b.
  • regions 2202c and 2204c may correspond to pixel masks or bounding boxes generated based on the corresponding contours 2202b, 2204b, respectively.
  • pixel masks may be generated to “fill in” the area inside the contours 2202b, 2204b or bounding boxes may be generated which encompass the contours 2202b, 2204b.
  • the pixel coordinates 2202d, 2204d generally correspond to the set of positions (e.g., rows and columns) of pixels within regions 2202c, 2204c.
  • Non-minimum suppression may involve, for example, determining bounding boxes associated with the contour 2202b, 2204b (e.g., using any appropriate object detection algorithm as appreciated by a person of skilled in the relevant art). For each bounding box, a score may be calculated. As described above with respect to non maximum suppression, the score may represent an extent to which the bounding box is similar to the other bounding boxes.
  • a subset of the bounding boxes is identified with scores that are less than a threshold value (e.g., of about 20%). This subset may be used to determine regions 2202c, 2204c.
  • regions 2202c, 2204c may include regions shared by each bounding box of the identified subsets. In other words, bounding boxes that are not below the minimum score are “suppressed” and not used to identify regions 2202b, 2204b.
  • the sensor client 105a may first check whether criteria are satisfied for distinguishing the region 2202c from region 2204c.
  • the criteria are generally designed to ensure that the contours 2202b, 2204b (and/or the associated regions 2202c, 2204c) are appropriately sized, shaped, and positioned to be associated with the heads of the corresponding people 2202, 2204.
  • These criteria may include one or more requirements. For example, one requirement may be that the regions 2202c, 2204c overlap by less than or equal to a threshold amount (e.g., of about 50%, e.g., of about 10%).
  • the separate heads of different people 2202, 2204 should not overlap in a top-view image 2212.
  • Another requirement may be that the regions 2202c, 2204c are within (e.g., bounded by, e.g., encompassed by) the merged-contour region 2222. This requirement, for example, ensures that the head contours 2202b, 2204b are appropriately positioned above the merged contour 2220 to correspond to heads of people 2202, 2204. If the contours 2202b, 2204b detected at the decreased depth are not within the merged contour 2220, then these contours 2202b, 2204b are likely not the associated with heads of the people 2202, 2204 associated with the merged contour 2220.
  • the sensor client 105a associates region 2202c with a first pixel position 2202e of person 2202 and associates region 2204c with a second pixel position 2204e of person 2204.
  • Each of the first and second pixel positions 2202e, 2204e generally corresponds to a single pixel position (e.g., row and column) associated with the location of the corresponding contour 2202b, 2204b in the image 2212.
  • the first and second pixel positions 2202e, 2204e are included in the pixel positions 2226 which may be transmitted to the server 106 to determine corresponding physical (e.g., global) positions 2228, for example, based on homographies 2230 (e.g., using a previously determined homography for sensor 108a associating pixel coordinates in images 2212 generated by sensor 108a to physical coordinates in the space 102).
  • sensor 108b is positioned and configured to generate angled-view images 2214 of at least a portion of the field of-of-view 2208a of sensor 108a.
  • the sensor client 105b receives the angled-view images 2214 from the second sensor 108b. Because of its different (e.g., angled) view of people 2202, 2204 in the space 102, an angled-view image 2214 obtained at t c iose may be sufficient to distinguish between the people 2202, 2204.
  • a view 2232 of contours 2202d, 2204d detected at tciose is shown in FIG. 22.
  • the sensor client 105b detects a contour 2202f corresponding to the first person 2202 and determines a corresponding region 2202g associated with pixel coordinates 2202h of contour 2202f.
  • the sensor client 105b detects a contour 2204f corresponding to the second person 2204 and determines a corresponding region 2204g associated with pixel coordinates 2204h of contour 2204f.
  • the sensor client 105b may associate region 2202g with a first pixel position 2202i of the first person 2202 and region 2204g with a second pixel position 2204i of the second person 2204.
  • Each of the first and second pixel positions 2202i, 2204i generally corresponds to a single pixel position (e.g., row and column) associated with the location of the corresponding contour 2202f, 2204f in the image 2214.
  • Pixel positions 2202i, 2204i may be included in pixel positions 2234 which may be transmitted to server 106 to determine physical positions 2228 of the people 2202, 2204 (e.g., using a previously determined homography for sensor 108b associating pixel coordinates of images 2214 generated by sensor 108b to physical coordinates in the space 102).
  • sensor 108a is configured to generate top-view color-depth images of at least a portion of the space 102.
  • the sensor client 105a identifies an image frame (e.g., associated with view 2218) corresponding to a time stamp (e.g., tciose) where contours 2202a, 2204a associated with the first and second person 2202, 2204, respectively, are merged and form contour 2220.
  • the client 105a may first attempt to detect separate contours for each person 2202, 2204 at a first decreased depth 2210b.
  • depth 2210b may be a predetermined height associated with an expected head height of people moving through the space 102.
  • depth 2210b may be a depth previously determined based on a measured height of person 2202 and/or a measured height of person 2204.
  • depth 2210b may be based on an average height of the two people 2202, 2204.
  • depth 2210b may be a depth corresponding to a predetermined head height of person 2202 (as illustrated in the example of FIG. 22). If two contours 2202b, 2204b are detected at depth 2210b, these contours may be used to determine pixel positions 2202e, 2204e of people 2202 and 2204, as described above.
  • depth 2210b If only one contour 2202b is detected at depth 2210b (e.g., if only one person 2202, 2204 is tall enough to be detected at depth 2210b), the region associated with this contour 2202b may be used to determine the pixel position 2202e of the corresponding person, and the next person may be detected at an increased depth 2210c.
  • Depth 2210c is generally greater than 2210b but less than depth 2210a. In the illustrative example of FIG. 22, depth 2210c corresponds to a predetermined head height of person 2204.
  • a pixel position 2204e is determined based on pixel coordinates 2204d associated with the contour 2204b (e.g., following determination that the criteria described above are satisfied). If a contour 2204b is not detected at depth 2210c, the client 105a may attempt to detect contours at progressively increased depths until a contour is detected or a maximum depth (e.g., the initial depth 2210a) is reached. For example, the sensor client 105a may continue to search for the contour 2204b at increased depths (i.e., depths between depth 2210c and the initial depth 2210a). If the maximum depth (e.g., depth 2210a) is reached without the contour 2204b being detected, the client 105a generally determines that the separate people 2202, 2204 cannot be detected.
  • a maximum depth e.g., depth 2210a
  • FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating a method 2300 of operating tracking system 100 to detect closely spaced people 2202, 2204.
  • Method 2300 may begin at step 2302 where the sensor client 105a receives one or more frames of top-view depth images 2212 generated by sensor 108a.
  • the sensor client 105a identifies a frame in which a first contour 2202a associated with the first person 2202 is merged with a second contour 2204a associated with the second person 2204.
  • the merged first and second contours i.e., merged contour 2220
  • the first depth 2212a may correspond to a waist or should depth of persons expected to be tracked in the space 102.
  • the detection of merged contour 2220 corresponds to the first person 2202 being located in the space within a threshold distance 2206b from the second person 2204, as described above.
  • the sensor client 105a determines a merged-contour region 2222.
  • Region 2222 is associated with pixel coordinates of the merged contour 2220.
  • region 2222 may correspond to coordinates of a pixel mask that overlays the detected contour.
  • region 2222 may correspond to pixel coordinates of a bounding box determined for the contour (e.g., using any appropriate object detection algorithm).
  • a method involving non-maximum suppression is used to detect region 2222.
  • region 2222 is determined using an artificial neural network.
  • an artificial neural network may be trained to detect contours at various depths in top-view images generated by sensor 108a.
  • the depth at which contours are detected in the identified image frame from step 2304 is decreased (e.g., to depth 2210b illustrated in FIG. 22).
  • the sensor client 105a determines whether a first contour (e.g., contour 2202b) is detected at the current depth. If the contour 2202b is not detected, the sensor client 105a proceeds, at step 2312a, to an increased depth (e.g., to depth 2210c). If the increased depth corresponds to having reached a maximum depth (e.g., to reaching the initial depth 2210a), the process ends because the first contour 2202b was not detected.
  • a first contour e.g., contour 2202b
  • the sensor client 105a returns to step 2310a and determines if the first contour 2202b is detected at the newly increased current depth. If the first contour 2202b is detected at step 2310a, the sensor client 105a, at step 2316a, determines a first region 2202c associated with pixel coordinates 2202d of the detected contour 2202b. In some embodiments, region 2202c may be determined using a method of non-minimal suppression, as described above. In some embodiments, region 2202c may be determined using an artificial neural network.
  • steps 2210b, 2212b, 2214b, and 2216b- may be used to determine a second region 2204c associated with pixel coordinates 2204d of the contour 2204b.
  • the sensor client 105a determines whether a second contour 2204b is detected at the current depth. If the contour 2204b is not detected, the sensor client 105a proceeds, at step 2312b, to an increased depth (e.g., to depth 2210c). If the increased depth corresponds to having reached a maximum depth (e.g., to reaching the initial depth 2210a), the process ends because the second contour 2204b was not detected.
  • the sensor client 105a returns to step 2310b and determines if the second contour 2204b is detected at the newly increased current depth. If the second contour 2204b is detected at step 2210a, the sensor client 105a, at step 2316a, determines a second region 2204c associated with pixel coordinates 2204d of the detected contour 2204b. In some embodiments, region 2204c may be determined using a method of non- minimal suppression or an artificial neural network, as described above. At step 2318, the sensor client 105a determines whether criteria are satisfied for distinguishing the first and second regions determined in steps 2316a and 2316b, respectively. For example, the criteria may include one or more requirements.
  • one requirement may be that the regions 2202c, 2204c overlap by less than or equal to a threshold amount (e.g., of about 10%).
  • a threshold amount e.g., of about 10%
  • Another requirement may be that the regions 2202c, 2204c are within (e.g., bounded by, e.g., encompassed by) the merged- contour region 2222 (determined at step 2306). If the criteria are not satisfied, method 2300 generally ends.
  • the method 2300 proceeds to steps 2320 and 2322 where the sensor client 105a associates the first region 2202b with a first pixel position 2202e of the first person 2202 (step 2320) and associates the second region 2204b with a first pixel position 2202e of the first person 2204 (step 2322).
  • Associating the regions 2202c, 2204c to pixel positions 2202e, 2204e may correspond to storing in a memory pixel coordinates 2202d, 2204d of the regions 2202c, 2204c and/or an average pixel position corresponding to each of the regions 2202c, 2204c along with an object identifier for the people 2202, 2204.
  • the sensor client 105a may transmit the first and second pixel positions (e.g., as pixel positions 2226) to the server 106.
  • the server 106 may apply a homography (e.g., of homographies 2230) for the sensor 2202 to the pixel positions to determine corresponding physical (e.g., global) positions 2228 for the first and second people 2202, 2204. Examples of generating and using homographies 2230 are described in greater detail above with respect to FIGS. 2-7.
  • Method 2300 may include more, fewer, or other steps. For example, steps may be performed in parallel or in any suitable order. While at times discussed as system 2200, sensor client 22105a, master server 2208, or components of any of thereof performing steps, any suitable system or components of the system may perform one or more steps of the method.
  • Multi-sensor image tracking on a local and global planes As described elsewhere in this disclosure (e.g., with respect to FIGS. 19-23 above), tracking people (e.g., or other target objects) in space 102 using multiple sensors 108 presents several previously unrecognized challenges. This disclosure encompasses not only the recognition of these challenges but also unique solutions to these challenges. For instance, systems and methods are described in this disclosure that track people both locally (e.g., by tracking pixel positions in images received from each sensor 108) and globally (e.g., by tracking physical positions on a global plane corresponding to the physical coordinates in the space 102). Person tracking may be more reliable when performed both locally and globally.
  • a person may still be tracked globally based on an image from a nearby sensor 108 (e.g., the angled-view sensor 108b described with respect to FIG. 22 above), an estimated local position of the person determined using a local tracking algorithm, and/or an estimated global position determined using a global tracking algorithm.
  • a nearby sensor 108 e.g., the angled-view sensor 108b described with respect to FIG. 22 above
  • an adjacent sensor 108 may still provide a view in which the people are separate entities (e.g., as illustrated in view 2232 of FIG. 22 above). Thus, information from an adjacent sensor 108 may be given priority for person tracking.
  • estimated pixel positions may be determined using a tracking algorithm and reported to the server 106 for global tracking, at least until the tracking algorithm determines that the estimated positions are below a threshold confidence level.
  • FIGS. 24A-C illustrate the use of a tracking subsystem 2400 to track a person 2402 through the space 102.
  • FIG. 24A illustrates a portion of the tracking system 100 of FIG. 1 when used to track the position of person 2402 based on image data generated by sensors 108a-c. The position of person 2402 is illustrated at three different time points: ti, h and t 3 .
  • Each of the sensors 108a-c is a sensor 108 of FIG. 1, described above.
  • Each sensor 108a-c has a corresponding field-of-view 2404a-c, which corresponds to the portion of the space 102 viewed by the sensor 108a-c. As shown in FIG.
  • each field-of-view 2404a-c overlaps with that of the adjacent sensor(s) 108a- c.
  • the adjacent fields-of-view 2404a-c may overlap by between about 10% and 30%.
  • Sensors 108a-c generally generate top-view images and transmit corresponding top-view image feeds 2406a-c to a tracking subsystem 2400.
  • the tracking subsystem 2400 includes the client(s) 105 and server 106 of FIG. 1.
  • the tracking system 2400 generally receives top-view image feeds 2406a-c generated by sensors 108a-c, respectively, and uses the received images (see FIG. 24B) to track a physical (e.g., global) position of the person 2402 in the space 102 (see FIG. 24C).
  • Each sensor 108a-c may be coupled to a corresponding sensor client 105 of the tracking subsystem 2400.
  • the tracking subsystem 2400 may include local particle filter trackers 2444 for tracking pixel positions of person 2402 in images generated by sensors 108a-b, global particle filter trackers 2446 for tracking physical positions of person 2402 in the space 102.
  • FIG. 24B shows example top-view images 2408a-c, 2418a-c, and 2426a-c generated by each of the sensors 108a-c at times ti, h and t 3 .
  • Certain of the top-view images include representations of the person 2402 (i.e., if the person 2402 was in the field-of-view 2404a-c of the sensor 108a-c at the time he image 2408a-c, 2418a-c, and 2426a-c was obtained).
  • images 2408a-c are generated by sensors 108a-c, respectively, and provided to the tracking subsystem 2400.
  • the tracking subsystem 2400 detects a contour 2410 associated with person 2402 in image 2408a.
  • the contour 2410 may correspond to a curve outlining the border of a representation of the person 2402 in image 2408a (e.g., detected based on color (e.g., RGB) image data at a predefined depth in image 2408a, as described above with respect to FIG. 19).
  • the tracking subsystem 2400 determines pixel coordinates 2412a, which are illustrated in this example by the bounding box 2412b in image 2408a.
  • Pixel position 2412c is determined based on the coordinates 2412a.
  • the pixel position 2412c generally refers to the location (i.e., row and column) of the person 2402 in the image 2408a.
  • the tracking system Since the object 2402 is also within the field-of-view 2404b of the second sensor 108b at ti (see FIG. 24A), the tracking system also detects a contour 2414 in image 2408b and determines corresponding pixel coordinates 2416a (i.e., associated with bounding box 2416b) for the object 2402. Pixel position 2416c is determined based on the coordinates 2416a. The pixel position 2416c generally refers to the pixel location (i.e., row and column) of the person 2402 in the image 2408b. At time ti, the object 2402 is not in the field-of-view 2404c of the third sensor 108c (see FIG. 24A). Accordingly, the tracking subsystem 2400 does not determine pixel coordinates for the object 2402 based on the image 2408c received from the third sensor 108c.
  • the tracking subsystem 2400 may determine a first global position 2438 based on the determined pixel positions 2412c and 2416c (e.g., corresponding to pixel coordinates 2412a, 2416a and bounding boxes 2412b, 2416b, described above).
  • the first global position 2438 corresponds to the position of the person 2402 in the space 102, as determined by the tracking subsystem 2400.
  • the tracking subsystem 2400 uses the pixel positions 2412c, 2416c determined via the two sensors 108a,b to determine a single physical position 2438 for the person 2402 in the space 102.
  • a first physical position 2412d may be determined from the pixel position 2412c associated with bounding box 2412b using a first homography associating pixel coordinates in the top-view images generated by the first sensor 108a to physical coordinates in the space 102.
  • a second physical position 2416d may similarly be determined using the pixel position 2416c associated with bounding box 2416b using a second homography associating pixel coordinates in the top-view images generated by the second sensor 108b to physical coordinates in the space 102.
  • the tracking subsystem 2400 may compare the distance between first and second physical positions 2412d and 2416d to a threshold distance 2448 to determine whether the positions 2412d, 2416d correspond to the same person or different people (see, e.g., step 2620 of FIG. 26, described below).
  • the first global position 2438 may be determined as an average of the first and second physical positions 2410d, 2414d. In some embodiments, the global position is determined by clustering the first and second physical positions 2410d, 2414d (e.g., using any appropriate clustering algorithm).
  • the first global position 2438 may correspond to (x,y) coordinates of the position of the person 2402 in the space 102.
  • the object 2402 is within fields-of-view 2404a and 2404b corresponding to sensors 108a, b.
  • a contour 2422 is detected in image 2418b and corresponding pixel coordinates 2424a, which are illustrated by bounding box 2424b, are determined.
  • Pixel position 2424c is determined based on the coordinates 2424a.
  • the pixel position 2424c generally refers to the location (i.e., row and column) of the person 2402 in the image 2418b.
  • the tracking subsystem 2400 fails to detect, in image 2418a from sensor 108a, a contour associated with object 2402.
  • the tracking subsystem 2400 may locally (e.g., at the particular client 105 which is coupled to sensor 108a) estimate pixel coordinates 2420a and/or corresponding pixel position 2420b for object 2402. For example, a local particle filter tracker 2444 for object 2402 in images generated by sensor 108a may be used to determine the estimated pixel position 2420b.
  • FIGS. 25A,B illustrate the operation of an example particle filter tracker 2444, 2446 (e.g., for determining estimated pixel position 2420a).
  • FIG. 25A illustrates a region 2500 in pixel coordinates or physical coordinates of space 102.
  • region 2500 may correspond to a pixel region in an image or to a region in physical space.
  • an object e.g., person 2402
  • the particle filter determines several estimated subsequent positions 2506 for the object.
  • the estimated subsequent positions 2506 are illustrated as the dots or “particles” in FIG. 25A and are generally determined based on a history of previous positions of the object.
  • another zone 2508 shows a position 2510 for another object (or the same object at a different time) along with estimated subsequent positions 2512 of the “particles” for this object.
  • the estimated subsequent positions 2506 are primarily clustered in a similar area above and to the right of position 2504, indicating that the particle filter tracker 2444, 2446 may provide a relatively good estimate of a subsequent position.
  • the estimated subsequent positions 2512 are relatively randomly distributed around position 2510 for the object, indicating that the particle filter tracker 2444, 2446 may provide a relatively poor estimate of a subsequent position.
  • FIG. 25B shows a distribution plot 2550 of the particles illustrated in FIG. 25A, which may be used to quantify the quality of an estimated position based on a standard deviation value (s).
  • curve 2552 corresponds to the position distribution of anticipated positions 2506, and curve 2554 corresponds to the position distribution of the anticipated positions 2512.
  • Curve 2554 has to a relatively narrow distribution such that the anticipated positions 2506 are primarily near the mean position (m).
  • the narrow distribution corresponds to the particles primarily having a similar position, which in this case is above and to right of position 2504.
  • curve 2554 has a broader distribution, where the particles are more randomly distributed around the mean position (m). Accordingly, the standard deviation of curve 2552 (si) is smaller than the standard deviation curve 2554 (02).
  • a standard deviation (e.g., either si or 02) may be used as a measure of an extent to which an estimated pixel position generated by the particle filter tracker 2444, 2446 is likely to be correct. If the standard deviation is less than a threshold standard deviation (othreshoid), as is the case with curve 2552 and si, the estimated position generated by a particle filter tracker 2444, 2446 may be used for object tracking. Otherwise, the estimated position generally is not used for object tracking.
  • a threshold standard deviation othreshoid
  • the tracking subsystem 2400 may determine a second global position 2440 for the object 2402 in the space 102 based on the estimated pixel position 2420b associated with estimated bounding box 2420a in frame 2418a and the pixel position 2424c associated with bounding box 2424b from frame 2418b.
  • a first physical position 2420c may be determined using a first homography associating pixel coordinates in the top-view images generated by the first sensor 108a to physical coordinates in the space 102.
  • a second physical position 2424d may be determined using a second homography associating pixel coordinates in the top-view images generated by the second sensor 108b to physical coordinates in the space 102.
  • the tracking subsystem 2400 i.e., server 106 of the tracking subsystem 2400
  • the second global position 2440 may correspond to (x,y) coordinates of the person 2402 in the space 102.
  • FIG. 24B shows that a contour 2428 and corresponding pixel coordinates 2430a, pixel region 2430b, and pixel position 2430c are determined in frame 2426b from sensor 108b, while a contour 2432 and corresponding pixel coordinates 2434a, pixel region 2434b, and pixel position 2434c are detected in frame 2426c from sensor 108c. As shown in FIG.
  • the tracking subsystem 2400 may determine a third global position 2442 for the object 2402 in the space based on the pixel position 2430c associated with bounding box 2430b in frame 2426b and the pixel position 2434c associated with bounding box 2434b from frame 2426c.
  • a first physical position 243 Od may be determined using a second homography associating pixel coordinates in the top-view images generated by the second sensor 108b to physical coordinates in the space 102.
  • a second physical position 2434d may be determined using a third homography associating pixel coordinates in the top-view images generated by the third sensor 108c to physical coordinates in the space 102.
  • the tracking subsystem 2400 may determine the global position 2442 based on the first and second physical positions 2430d, 2434d, as described above with respect to times ti and ⁇ 2.
  • FIG. 26 is a flow diagram illustrating the tracking of person2402 in space the 102 based on top-view images (e.g., images 2408a-c, 2418a0c, 2426a-c from feeds 2406a, b, generated by sensors 108a,b, described above.
  • Field-of-view 2404a of sensor 108a and field-of-view 2404b of sensors 108b generally overlap by a distance 2602.
  • distance 2602 may be about 10% to 30% of the fields-of-view 2404a, b.
  • the tracking subsystem 2400 includes the first sensor client 105a, the second sensor client 105b, and the server 106.
  • Each of the first and second sensor clients 105a, b may be a client 105 described above with respect to FIG. 1.
  • the first sensor client 105a is coupled to the first sensor 108a and configured to track, based on the first feed 2406a, a first pixel position 2112c of the person 2402.
  • the second sensor client 105b is coupled to the second sensor 108b and configured to track, based on the second feed 2406b, a second pixel position 2416c of the same person 2402.
  • the server 106 generally receives pixel positions from clients 105a,b and tracks the global position of the person 2402 in the space 102.
  • the server 106 employs a global particle filter tracker 2446 to track a global physical position of the person 2402 and one or more other people 2604 in the space 102). Tracking people both locally (i.e., at the “pixel level” using clients 105a, b) and globally (i.e., based on physical positions in the space 102) improves tracking by reducing and/or eliminating noise and/or other tracking errors which may result from relying on either local tracking by the clients 105a,b or global tracking by the server 106 alone.
  • FIG. 26 illustrates a method 2600 implemented by sensor clients 105a,b and server 106.
  • Sensor client 105a receives the first data feed 2406a from sensor 108a at step 2606a.
  • the feed may include top-view images (e.g., images 2408a-c, 2418a-c, 2426a-c of FIG. 24).
  • the images may be color images, depth images, or color-depth images.
  • the sensor client 105a determines whether a contour is detected at step 2608a. If a contour is detected at the timestamp, the sensor client 105a determines a first pixel position 2412c for the contour at step 2610a.
  • the first pixel position 2412c may correspond to pixel coordinates associated with a bounding box 2412b determined for the contour (e.g., using any appropriate object detection algorithm).
  • the sensor client 105a may generate a pixel mask that overlays the detected contour and determine pixel coordinates of the pixel mask, as described above with respect to step 2104 of FIG. 21.
  • a first particle filter tracker 2444 may be used to estimate a pixel position (e.g., estimated position 2420b), based on a history of previous positions of the contour 2410, at step 2612a. For example, the first particle filter tracker 2444 may generate a probability -weighted estimate of a subsequent first pixel position corresponding to the timestamp (e.g., as described above with respect to FIGS. 25 A, B). Generally, if the confidence level (e.g., based on a standard deviation) of the estimated pixel position 2420b is below a threshold value (e.g., see FIG.
  • no pixel position is determined for the timestamp by the sensor client 105a, and no pixel position is reported to server 106 for the timestamp. This prevents the waste of processing resources which would otherwise be expended by the server 106 in processing unreliable pixel position data.
  • the server 106 can often still track person 2402, even when no pixel position is provided for a given timestamp, using the global particle filter tracker 2446 (see steps 2626, 2632, and 2636 below).
  • the second sensor client 105b receives the second data feed 2406b from sensor 108b at step 2606b.
  • the same or similar steps to those described above for sensor client 105a are used to determine a second pixel position 2416c for a detected contour 2414 or estimate a pixel position based on a second particle filter tracker 2444.
  • the sensor client 105b determines whether a contour 2414 is detected in an image from feed 2406b at a given timestamp. If a contour 2414 is detected at the timestamp, the sensor client 105b determines a first pixel position 2416c for the contour 2414 at step 2610b (e.g., using any of the approaches described above with respect to step 2610a).
  • a second particle filter tracker 2444 may be used to estimate a pixel position at step 2612b (e.g., as described above with respect to step 2612a). If the confidence level of the estimated pixel position is below a threshold value (e.g., based on a standard deviation value for the tracker 2444), no pixel position is determined for the timestamp by the sensor client 105b, and no pixel position is reported for the timestamp to the server 106.
  • a threshold value e.g., based on a standard deviation value for the tracker 2444
  • steps 2606a,b-2612a,b are described as being performed by sensor client 105a and 105b, it should be understood that in some embodiments, a single sensor client 105 may receive the first and second image feeds 2406a, b from sensors 108a,b and perform the steps described above. Using separate sensor clients 105a,b for separate sensors 108a,b or sets of sensors 108 may provide redundancy in case of client 105 malfunctions (e.g., such that even if one sensor client 105 fails, feeds from other sensors may be processed by other still-functioning clients 105).
  • the server 106 receives the pixel positions 2412c, 2416c determined by the sensor clients 105a, b.
  • the server 106 may determine a first physical position 2412d based on the first pixel position 2412c determined at step 2610a or estimated at step 2612a by the first sensor client 105a.
  • the first physical position 2412d may be determined using a first homography associating pixel coordinates in the top-view images generated by the first sensor 108a to physical coordinates in the space 102.
  • the server 106 may determine a second physical position 2416d based on the second pixel position 2416c determined at step 2610b or estimated at step 2612b by the first sensor client 105b.
  • the second physical position 2416d may be determined using a second homography associating pixel coordinates in the top-view images generated by the second sensor 108b to physical coordinates in the space 102.
  • the server 106 determines whether the first and second positions 2412d, 2416d (from steps 2616 and 2618) are within a threshold distance 2448 (e.g., of about six inches) of each other.
  • the threshold distance 2448 may be determined based on one or more characteristics of the system tracking system 100 and/or the person 2402 or another target object being tracked.
  • the threshold distance 2448 may be based on one or more of the distance of the sensors 108a-b from the object, the size of the object, the fields-of-view 2404a-b, the sensitivity of the sensors 108a-b, and the like. Accordingly, the threshold distance 2448 may range from just over zero inches to greater than six inches depending on these and other characteristics of the tracking system 100.
  • the server 106 determines that the positions 2412d, 2416d correspond to the same person 2402 at step 2622. In other words, the server 106 determines that the person detected by the first sensor 108a is the same person detected by the second sensor 108b. This may occur, at a given timestamp, because of the overlap 2604 between field-of-view 2404a and field-of-view 2404b of sensors 108a and 108b, as illustrated in FIG. 26.
  • the server 106 determines a global position 2438 (i.e., a physical position in the space 102) for the object based on the first and second physical positions from steps 2616 and 2618. For instance, the server 106 may calculate an average of the first and second physical positions 2412d, 2416d. In some embodiments, the global position 2438 is determined by clustering the first and second physical positions 2412d, 2416d (e.g., using any appropriate clustering algorithm).
  • a global particle filter tracker 2446 is used to track the global (e.g., physical) position 2438 of the person 2402. An example of a particle filter tracker is described above with respect to FIGS. 25 A, B.
  • the global particle filter tracker 2446 may generate probability- weighted estimates of subsequent global positions at subsequent times. If a global position 2438 cannot be determined at a subsequent timestamp (e.g., because pixel positions are not available from the sensor clients 105a,b), the particle filter tracker 2446 may be used to estimate the position.
  • the server 106 determines that the positions correspond to different objects 2402, 2604 at step 2628. In other words, the server 106 may determine that the physical positions determined at steps 2616 and 2618 are sufficiently different, or far apart, for them to correspond to the first person 2402 and a different second person 2604 in the space 102.
  • the server 106 determines a global position for the first object 2402 based on the first physical position 2412c from step 2616.
  • the global position is the first physical position 2412c.
  • the global position of the first person 2402 may be an average of the positions or determined based on the positions using any appropriate clustering algorithm, as described above.
  • a global particle filter tracker 2446 may be used to track the first global position of the first person 2402, as is also described above.
  • the server 106 determines a global position for the second person 2404 based on the second physical position 2416c from step 2618.
  • the global position is the second physical position 2416c. If other physical positions are associated with the second object (e.g., based on data from other sensors 108, which not shown in FIG. 26 for clarity), the global position of the second person 2604 may be an average of the positions or determined based on the positions using any appropriate clustering algorithm.
  • a global particle filter tracker 2446 is used to track the second global position of the second object, as described above.
  • Modifications, additions, or omissions may be made to the method 2600 described above with respect to FIG. 26.
  • the method may include more, fewer, or other steps. For example, steps may be performed in parallel or in any suitable order. While at times discussed as a tracking subsystem 2400, sensor clients 105a,b, server 106, or components of any thereof performing steps, any suitable system or components of the system may perform one or more steps of the method 2600.
  • the tracking system 100 When the tracking system 100 is tracking people in the space 102, it may be challenging to reliably identify people under certain circumstances such as when they pass into or near an auto-exclusion zone (see FIGS. 19-21 and corresponding description above), when they stand near another person (see FIGS. 22-23 and corresponding description above), and/or when one or more of the sensors 108, client(s) 105, and/or server 106 malfunction. For instance, after a first person becomes close to or even comes into contact with (e.g., “collides” with) a second person, it may difficult to determine which person is which (e.g., as described above with respect to FIG. 22).
  • tracking systems may use physics-based tracking algorithms in an attempt to determine which person is which based on estimated trajectories of the people (e.g., estimated as though the people are marbles colliding and changing trajectories according to a conservation of momentum, or the like).
  • identities of people may be more difficult to track reliably, because movements may be random.
  • the tracking system 100 may employ particle filter tracking for improved tracking of people in the space 102 (see e.g., FIGS. 24-26 and the corresponding description above).
  • the identities of people being tracked may be difficult to determine at certain times.
  • This disclosure particularly encompasses the recognition that positions of people who are shopping in a store (i.e., moving about a space, selecting items, and picking up the items) are difficult or impossible to track using previously available technology because movement of these people is random and does not follow a readily defined pattern or model (e.g., such as the physics-based models of previous approaches). Accordingly, there is a lack of tools for reliably and efficiently tracking people (e.g., or other target objects).
  • This disclosure provides a solution to the problems of previous technology, including those described above, by maintaining a record, which is referred to in this disclosure as a “candidate list,” of possible person identities, or identifiers (i.e., the usernames, account numbers, etc. of the people being tracked), during tracking.
  • a candidate list is generated and updated during tracking to establish the possible identities of each tracked person.
  • the candidate list also includes a probability that the identity, or identifier, is believed to be correct.
  • the candidate list is updated following interactions (e.g., collisions) between people and in response to other uncertainty events (e.g., a loss of sensor data, imaging errors, intentional trickery, etc.).
  • the candidate list may be used to determine when a person should be re-identified (e.g., using methods described in greater detail below with respect to FIGS. 29-32). Generally, re-identification is appropriate when the candidate list of a tracked person indicates that the person’s identity is not sufficiently well known (e.g., based on the probabilities stored in the candidate list being less than a threshold value).
  • the candidate list is used to determine when a person is likely to have exited the space 102 (i.e., with at least a threshold confidence level), and an exit notification is only sent to the person after there is high confidence level that the person has exited (see, e.g., view 2730 of FIG. 27, described below). In general, processing resources may be conserved by only performing potentially complex person re- identification tasks when a candidate list indicates that a person’s identity is no longer known according to pre-established criteria.
  • FIG. 27 is a flow diagram illustrating how identifiers 2701a-c associated with tracked people (e.g., or any other target object) may be updated during tracking over a period of time from an initial time to to a final time t by tracking system 100. People may be tracked using tracking system 100 based on data from sensors 108, as described above.
  • FIG. 27 depicts a plurality of views 2702, 2716, 2720, 2724, 2728, 2730 at different time points during tracking.
  • views 2702, 2716, 2720, 2724, 2728, 2730 correspond to a local frame view (e.g., as described above with respect to FIG.
  • views 2702, 2716, 2720, 2724, 2728, 2730 correspond to global views of the space 102 determined based on data from multiple sensors 108 with coordinates corresponding to physical positions in the space (e.g., as determined using the homographies described in greater detail above with respect to FIGS. 2-7).
  • FIG. 27 is described below in terms of global views of the space 102 (i.e., a view corresponding to the physical coordinates of the space 102).
  • the tracked object regions 2704, 2708, 2712 correspond to regions of the space 102 associated with the positions of corresponding people (e.g., or any other target object) moving through the space 102.
  • each tracked object region 2704, 2708, 2712 may correspond to a different person moving about in the space 102. Examples of determining the regions 2704, 2708, 2712 are described above, for example, with respect to FIGS. 21, 22, and 24.
  • the tracked object regions 2704, 2708, 2712 may be bounding boxes identified for corresponding objects in the space 102.
  • tracked object regions 2704, 2708, 2712 may correspond to pixel masks determined for contours associated with the corresponding objects in the space 102 (see, e.g., step 2104 of FIG. 21 for a more detailed description of the determination of a pixel mask).
  • people may be tracked in the space 102 and regions 2704, 2708, 2712 may be determined using any appropriate tracking and identification method.
  • View 2702 at initial time to includes a first tracked object region 2704, a second tracked object region 2708, and a third tracked object region 2712.
  • the view 2702 may correspond to a representation of the space 102 from a top view with only the tracked object regions 2704, 2708, 2712 shown (i.e., with other objects in the space 102 omitted).
  • the identities of all of the people are generally known (e.g., because the people have recently entered the space 102 and/or because the people have not yet been near each other).
  • View 2716 shows positions of the tracked objects 2704, 2708, 2712 at a first time ti, which is after the initial time to.
  • the tracking system detects an event which may cause the identities of the tracked object regions 2704, 2708 to be less certain.
  • the tracking system 100 detects that the distance 2718a between the first object region 274 and the second object region 2708 is less than or equal to a threshold distance 2718b. Because the tracked object regions were near each other (i.e., within the threshold distance 2718b), there is a non-zero probability that the regions may be misidentified during subsequent times.
  • the threshold distance 2718b may be any appropriate distance, as described above with respect to FIG. 22.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine that the first object region 2704 is within the threshold distance 2718b of the second object region 2708 by determining first coordinates of the first object region 2704, determining second coordinates of the second object region 2708, calculating a distance 2718a, and comparing distance 2718a to the threshold distance 2718b.
  • the first and second coordinates correspond to pixel coordinates in an image capturing the first and second people
  • the distance 2718a corresponds to a number of pixels between these pixel coordinates.
  • the distance 2718a may correspond to the pixel distance between centroids of the tracked object regions 2704, 2708.
  • the first and second coordinates correspond to physical, or global, coordinates in the space 102, and the distance 2718a corresponds to a physical distance (e.g., in units of length, such as inches).
  • physical coordinates may be determined using the homographies described in greater detail above with respect to FIGS. 2-7.
  • the tracking system 100 After detecting that the identities of regions 2704, 2708 are less certain (i.e., that the first object region 2704 is within the threshold distance 2718b of the second object region 2708), the tracking system 100 determines a probability 2717 that the first tracked object region 2704 switched identifiers 2701a-c with the second tracked object region 2708. For example, when two contours become close in an image, there is a chance that the identities of the contours may be incorrect during subsequent tracking (e.g., because the tracking system 100 may assign the wrong identifier 2701a-c to the contours between frames).
  • the probability 2717 that the identifiers 2701a-c switched may be determined, for example, by accessing a predefined probability value (e.g., of 50%).
  • the probability 2717 may be based on the distance 2718a between the object regions 2704, 2708. For example, as the distance 2718 decreases, the probability 2717 that the identifiers 2701a-c switched may increase. In the example of FIG. 27, the determined probability 2717 is 20%, because the object regions 2704, 2708 are relatively far apart but there is some overlap between the regions 2704, 2708.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine a relative orientation between the first object region 2704 and the second object region 2708, and the probability 2717 that the object regions 2704, 2708 switched identifiers 2701a-c may be based on this relative orientation.
  • the relative orientation may correspond to an angle between a direction a person associated with the first region 2704 is facing and a direction a person associated with the second region 2708 is facing. For example, if the angle between the directions faced by people associated with first and second regions 2704, 2708 is near 180° (i.e., such that the people are facing in opposite directions), the probability 2717 that identifiers 2701a-c switched may be decreased because this case may correspond to one person accidentally backing into the other person.
  • the tracking system 100 updates the first candidate list 2706 for the first object region 2704.
  • the second candidate list 2710 for the second object region 2708 is similarly updated based on the probability 2717 that the first object region 2704 switched identifiers 2701a-c with the second object region 2708.
  • View 2720 shows the object regions 2704, 2708, 2712 at a second time point h, which follows time ti.
  • a first person corresponding to the first tracked region 2704 stands close to a third person corresponding to the third tracked region 2712.
  • the tracking system 100 detects that the distance 2722 between the first object region 2704 and the third object region 2712 is less than or equal to the threshold distance 2718b (i.e., the same threshold distance 2718b described above with respect to view 2716). After detecting that the first object region 2704 is within the threshold distance 2718b of the third object region 2712, the tracking system 100 determines a probability 2721 that the first tracked object region 2704 switched identifiers 2701a-c with the third tracked object region 2712.
  • the probability 2721 that the identifiers 2701a-c switched may be determined, for example, by accessing a predefined probability value (e.g., of 50%). In some cases, the probability 2721 may be based on the distance 2722 between the object regions 2704, 2712. For example, since the distance 2722 is greater than distance 2718a (from view 2716, described above), the probability 2721 that the identifiers 2701a-c switched may be greater at time ti than at time h. In the example of view 2720 of FIG. 27, the determined probability 2721 is 10% (which is smaller than the switching probability 2717 of 20% determined at time ti).
  • a predefined probability value e.g. 50%
  • the probability 2721 may be based on the distance 2722 between the object regions 2704, 2712. For example, since the distance 2722 is greater than distance 2718a (from view 2716, described above), the probability 2721 that the identifiers 2701a-c switched may be greater at time ti than at time h. In the example of
  • the tracking system 100 updates the first candidate list 2706 for the first object region 2704.
  • the third candidate list 2714 for the third object region 2712 is similarly updated based on the probability 2721 that the first object region 2704 switched identifiers 2701a-c with the third object region 2712.
  • This unique “propagation effect” facilitates improved object identification and can be used to narrow the search space (e.g., the number of possible identifiers 2701a-c that may be associated with a tracked object region 2704, 2708, 2712) when object re-identification is needed (as described in greater detail below and with respect to FIGS. 29-32).
  • View 2724 shows third object region 2712 and an unidentified object region 2726 at a third time point t3, which follows time h.
  • the first and second people associated with regions 2704, 2708 come into contact (e.g., or “collide”) or are otherwise so close to one another that the tracking system 100 cannot distinguish between the people.
  • contours detected for determining the first object region 2704 and the second object region 2708 may have merged resulting in the single unidentified object region 2726. Accordingly, the position of object region 2726 may correspond to the position of one or both of object regions 2704 and 2708.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine that the first and second object regions 2704, 2708 are no longer detected because a first contour associated with the first object region 2704 is merged with a second contour associated with the second object region 2708.
  • the tracking system 100 may wait until a subsequent time U (shown in view 2728) when the first and second object regions 2704, 2708 are again detected before the candidate lists 2706, 2710 are updated.
  • Time U generally corresponds to a time when the first and second people associated with regions 2704, 2708 have separated from each other such that each person can be tracked in the space 102.
  • the probability 2725 that regions 2704 and 2708 have switched identifiers 2701a-c may be 50%.
  • Candidate list 2714 is unchanged.
  • the tracking system 100 may extract features, or descriptors, associated with observable characteristics of the first person (or corresponding contour) associated with the first object region 2704.
  • the observable characteristics may be a height of the object (e.g., determined from depth data received from a sensor), a color associated with an area inside the contour (e.g., based on color image data from a sensor 108), a width of the object, an aspect ratio (e.g., width/length) of the object, a volume of the object (e.g., based on depth data from sensor 108), or the like. Examples of other descriptors are described in greater detail below with respect to FIG. 30.
  • a texture feature (e.g., determined using a local binary pattern histogram (LBPH) algorithm) may be calculated for the person.
  • an artificial neural network may be used to associate the person with the correct identifier 2701a-c (e.g., as described in greater detail below with respect to FIG. 29-32).
  • Using the candidate lists 2706, 2710, 2714 may facilitate more efficient re- identification than was previously possible because, rather than checking all possible identifiers 2701a-c (e.g., and other identifiers of people in space 102 not illustrated in FIG. 27) for a region 2704, 2708, 2712 that has an uncertain identity, the tracking system 100 may identify a subset of all the other identifiers 2701a-c that are most likely to be associated with the unknown region 2704, 2708, 2712 and only compare descriptors of the unknown region 2704, 2708, 2712 to descriptors associated with the subset of identifiers 2701a-c.
  • the tracking system 100 may identify a subset of all the other identifiers 2701a-c that are most likely to be associated with the unknown region 2704, 2708, 2712 and only compare descriptors of the unknown region 2704, 2708, 2712 to descriptors associated with the subset of identifiers 2701a-c.
  • the tracking system 100 may only check to see if the person is one of the few people indicated in the person’s candidate list, rather than comparing the unknown person to all of the people in the space 102. For example, only identifiers 2701a-c associated with a non-zero probability, or a probability greater than a threshold value, in the candidate list 2706 are likely to be associated with the correct identifier 2701a-c of the first region 2704.
  • the subset may include identifiers 2701a-c from the first candidate list 2706 with probabilities that are greater than a threshold probability value (e.g., of 10%).
  • the tracking system 100 may compare descriptors of the person associated with region 2704 to predetermined descriptors associated with the subset.
  • the predetermined features may be determined when a person enters the space 102 and associated with the known identifier 2701a-c of the person during the entrance time period (i.e., before any events may cause the identity of the person to be uncertain.
  • View 2730 corresponds to a time t at which only the person associated with object region 2712 remains within the space 102.
  • View 2730 illustrates how the candidate lists 2706, 2710, 2714 can be used to ensure that people only receive an exit notification 2734 when the system 100 is certain the person has exited the space 102.
  • An exit notification 2734 is generally sent to the device of a person and includes an acknowledgement that the tracking system 100 has determined that the person has exited the space 102. For example, if the space 102 is a store, the exit notification 2734 provides a confirmation to the person that the tracking system 100 knows the person has exited the store and is, thus, no longer shopping. This may provide assurance to the person that the tracking system 100 is operating properly and is no longer assigning items to the person or incorrectly charging the person for items that he/she did not intend to purchase.
  • the tracking system 100 may maintain a record 2732 of exit probabilities to determine when an exit notification 2734 should be sent.
  • an exit notification 2734 is not sent, because there is still a chance that the first person is still in the space 102 (i.e., because of identity uncertainties that are captured and recorded via the candidate lists 2706, 2710, 2714). This prevents a person from receiving an exit notification 2734 before he/she has exited the space 102.
  • Pc , exit 10%
  • FIG. 28 is a flowchart of a method 2800 for creating and/or maintaining candidate lists 2706, 2710, 2714 by tracking system 100.
  • Method 2800 generally facilitates improved identification of tracked people (e.g., or other target objects) by maintaining candidate lists 2706, 2710, 2714 which, for a given tracked person, or corresponding tracked object region (e.g., region 2704, 2708, 2712), include possible identifiers 2701a-c for the object and a corresponding probability that each identifier 2701a-c is correct for the person.
  • the people may be more effectively and efficiently identified during tracking. For example, costly person re-identifi cation (e.g., in terms of system resources expended) may only be used when a candidate list indicates that a person’s identity is sufficiently uncertain.
  • Method 2800 may begin at step 2802 where image frames are received from one or more sensors 108.
  • the tracking system 100 uses the received frames to track objects in the space 102.
  • tracking is performed using one or more of the unique tools described in this disclosure (e.g., with respect to FIGS. 24-26).
  • any appropriate method of sensor-based object tracking may be employed.
  • the tracking system 100 determines whether a first person is within a threshold distance 2718b of a second person. This case may correspond to the conditions shown in view 2716 of FIG. 27, described above, where first object region 2704 is distance 2718a away from second object region 2708. As described above, the distance 2718a may correspond to a pixel distance measured in a frame or a physical distance in the space 102 (e.g., determined using a homography associating pixel coordinates to physical coordinates in the space 102). If the first and second people are not within the threshold distance 2718b of each other, the system 100 continues tracking objects in the space 102 (i.e., by returning to step 2804).
  • step 2808 the probability 2717 that the first and second people switched identifiers 2701a-c is determined.
  • the probability 2717 that the identifiers 2701a-c switched may be determined, for example, by accessing a predefined probability value (e.g., of 50%).
  • the probability 2717 is based on the distance 2718a between the people (or corresponding object regions 2704, 2708), as described above.
  • the tracking system 100 determines a relative orientation between the first person and the second person, and the probability 2717 that the people (or corresponding object regions 2704, 2708) switched identifiers 2701a-c is determined, at least in part, based on this relative orientation.
  • the candidate lists 2706, 2710 for the first and second people are updated based on the probability 2717 determined at step 2808.
  • the updated first candidate list 2706 may include a probability that the first object is associated with the first identifier 2701a and a probability that the first object is associated with the second identifier 2701b.
  • the second candidate list 2710 for the second person is similarly updated based on the probability 2717 that the first object switched identifiers 2701a-c with the second object (determined at step 2808).
  • the updated second candidate list 2710 may include a probability that the second person is associated with the first identifier 2701a and a probability that the second person is associated with the second identifier 2701b.
  • the tracking system 100 determines whether the first person (or corresponding region 2704) is within a threshold distance 2718b of a third object (or corresponding region 2712).
  • a threshold distance 2718b of a third object may correspond, for example, to the conditions shown in view 2720 of FIG. 27, described above, where first object region 2704 is distance 2722 away from third object region 2712.
  • the threshold distance 2718b may correspond to a pixel distance measured in a frame or a physical distance in the space 102 (e.g., determined using an appropriate homography associating pixel coordinates to physical coordinates in the space 102).
  • step 2814 the probability 2721 that the first and third people (or corresponding regions 2704 and 2712) switched identifiers 2701a-c is determined.
  • this probability 2721 that the identifiers 2701a-c switched may be determined, for example, by accessing a predefined probability value (e.g., of 50%).
  • the probability 2721 may also or alternatively be based on the distance 2722 between the objects 2727and/or a relative orientation of the first and third people, as described above.
  • the candidate lists 2706, 2714 for the first and third people are updated based on the probability 2721 determined at step 2808.
  • the updated first candidate list 2706 may include a probability that the first person is associated with the first identifier 2701a, a probability that the first person is associated with the second identifier 2701b, and a probability that the first object is associated with the third identifier 2701c.
  • the third candidate list 2714 for the third person is similarly updated based on the probability 2721 that the first person switched identifiers with the third person (i.e., determined at step 2814).
  • the updated third candidate list 2714 may include, for example, a probability that the third object is associated with the first identifier 2701a, a probability that the third object is associated with the second identifier 2701b, and a probability that the third object is associated with the third identifier 2701c. Accordingly, if the steps of method 2800 proceed in the example order illustrated in FIG. 28, the candidate list 2714 of the third person includes a non-zero probability that the third object is associated with the second identifier 2701b, which was originally associated with the second person.
  • the system 100 determines whether the first person is within a threshold distance of an n th person (i.e., some other person in the space 102).
  • the system 100 determines the probability that the first and n th people switched identifiers 2701a- c, as described above, for example, with respect to steps 2808 and 2814.
  • the candidate lists for the first and n th people are updated based on the probability determined at step 2820, as described above, for example, with respect to steps 2810 and 2816 before method 2800 ends. If, at step 2818, the first person is not within the threshold distance of the h L person, the method 2800 proceeds to step 2824.
  • the tracking system 100 determines if a person has exited the space 102. For instance, as described above, the tracking system 100 may determine that a contour associated with a tracked person is no longer detected for at least a threshold time period (e.g., of about 30 seconds or more).
  • the system 100 may additionally determine that a person exited the space 102 when a person is no longer detected and a last determined position of the person was at or near an exit position (e.g., near a door leading to a known exit from the space 102). If a person has not exited the space 102, the tracking system 100 continues to track people (e.g., by returning to step 2802).
  • the tracking system 100 calculates or updates record 2732 of probabilities that the tracked objects have exited the space 102 at step 2826.
  • each exit probability of record 2732 generally corresponds to a probability that a person associated with each identifier 2701a-c has exited the space 102.
  • the tracking system 100 determines if a combined exit probability in the record 2732 is greater than a threshold value (e.g., of 95% or greater). If a combined exit probability is not greater than the threshold, the tracking system 100 continues to track objects (e.g., by continuing to step 2818).
  • a corresponding exit notification 2734 may be sent to the person linked to the identifier 2701a-c associated with the probability at step 2830, as described above with respect to view 2730 of FIG. 27. This may prevent or reduce instances where an exit notification 2734 is sent prematurely while an object is still in the space 102. For example, it may be beneficial to delay sending an exit notification 2734 until there is a high certainty that the associated person is no longer in the space 102. In some cases, several tracked people must exit the space 102 before an exit probability in record 2732 for a given identifier 2701a-c is sufficiently large for an exit notification 2734 to be sent to the person (e.g., to a device associated with the person).
  • Method 2800 may include more, fewer, or other steps. For example, steps may be performed in parallel or in any suitable order. While at times discussed as tracking system 100 or components thereof performing steps, any suitable system or components of the system may perform one or more steps of the method 2800. Person re-identification
  • the identity of a tracked person can become unknown (e.g., when the people become closely spaced or “collide”, or when the candidate list of a person indicates the person’s identity is not known, as described above with respect to FIGS. 27-28), and the person may need to be re-identified.
  • This disclosure contemplates a unique approach to efficiently and reliably re-identifying people by the tracking system 100.
  • a more efficient and specially structured approach may be used where “lower-cost” descriptors related to observable characteristics (e.g., height, color, width, volume, etc.) of people are used first for person re-identification.
  • “Higher-cost” descriptors e.g., determined using artificial neural network models
  • a person may first be re-identified based on his/her height, hair color, and/or shoe color.
  • each person’s height may be used initially for re-identification.
  • a height descriptor may not be sufficient for re-identifying the people (e.g., because it is not possible to distinguish between people with a similar heights based on height alone), and a higher- level approach may be used (e.g., using a texture operator or an artificial neural network to characterize the person).
  • FIG. 29 illustrates a tracking subsystem 2900 configured to track people (e.g., and/or other target objects) based on sensor data 2904 received from one or more sensors 108.
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 may include one or both of the server 106 and the client(s) 105 of FIG. 1, described above.
  • Tracking subsystem 2900 may be implemented using the device 3800 described below with respect to FIG. 38.
  • Tracking subsystem 2900 may track object positions 2902, over a period of time using sensor data 2904 (e.g., top-view images) generated by at least one of sensors 108.
  • Object positions 2902 may correspond to local pixel positions (e.g., pixel positions 2226, 2234 of FIG. 22) determined at a single sensor 108 and/or global positions corresponding to physical positions (e.g., positions 2228 of FIG. 22) in the space 102 (e.g., using the homographies described above with respect to FIGS. 2-7).
  • object positions 2902 may correspond to regions detected in an image, or in the space 102, that are associated with the location of a corresponding person (e.g., regions 2704, 2708, 2712 of FIG. 27, described above). People may be tracked and corresponding positions 2902 may be determined, for example, based on pixel coordinates of contours detected in top-view images generated by sensor(s) 108. Examples of contour-based detection and tracking are described above, for example, with respect to FIGS. 24 and 27. However, in general, any appropriate method of sensor-based tracking may be used to determine positions 2902.
  • the subsystem 2900 For each object position 2902, the subsystem 2900 maintains a corresponding candidate list 2906 (e.g., as described above with respect to FIG. 27).
  • the candidate lists 2906 are generally used to maintain a record of the most likely identities of each person being tracked (i.e., associated with positions 2902).
  • Each candidate list 2906 includes probabilities which are associated with identifiers 2908 of people that have entered the space 102.
  • the identifiers 2908 may be any appropriate representation (e.g., an alphanumeric string, or the like) for identifying a person (e.g., a username, name, account number, or the like associated with the person being tracked).
  • the identifiers 2908 may be anonymized (e.g., using hashing or any other appropriate anonymization technique).
  • Each of the identifiers 2908 is associated with one or more predetermined descriptors 2910.
  • the predetermined descriptors 2910 generally correspond to information about the tracked people that can be used to re-identify the people when necessary (e.g., based on the candidate lists 2906).
  • the predetermined descriptors 2910 may include values associated with observable and/or calculated characteristics of the people associated with the identifiers 2908. For instance, the descriptors 2910 may include heights, hair colors, clothing colors, and the like.
  • the predetermined descriptors 2910 are generally determined by the tracking subsystem 2900 during an initial time period (e.g., when a person associated with a given tracked position 2902 enters the space) and are used to re-identify people associated with tracked positions 2902 when necessary (e.g., based on candidate lists 2906).
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 may determine measured descriptors 2912 for the person associated with the position 2902.
  • FIG. 30 illustrates the determination of descriptors 2910, 2912 based on a top-view depth image 3002 received from a sensor 108.
  • a representation 2904a of a person corresponding to the tracked object position 2902 is observable in the image 3002.
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 may detect a contour 3004b associated with the representation 3004a.
  • the contour 3004b may correspond to a boundary of the representation 3004a (e.g., determined at a given depth in image 3002).
  • Tracking subsystem 2900 generally determines descriptors 2910, 2912 based on the representation 3004a and/or the contour 3004b.
  • the representation 3004b appears within a predefined region-of- interest 3006 of the image 3002 in order for descriptors 2910, 2912 to be determined by the tracking subsystem 2900.
  • This may facilitate more reliable descriptor 2910, 2912 determination, for example, because descriptors 2910, 2912 may be more reproducible and/or reliable when the person being imaged is located in the portion of the sensor’s field-of-view that corresponds to this region-of-interest 3006.
  • descriptors 2910, 2912 may have more consistent values when the person is imaged within the region-of-interest 3006.
  • Descriptors 2910, 2912 determined in this manner may include, for example, observable descriptors 3008 and calculated descriptors 3010.
  • the observable descriptors 3008 may correspond to characteristics of the representation 3004a and/or contour 3004b which can be extracted from the image 3002 and which correspond to observable features of the person.
  • Examples of observable descriptors 3008 include a height descriptor 3012 (e.g., a measure of the height in pixels or units of length) of the person based on representation 3004a and/or contour 3004b), a shape descriptor 3014 (e.g., width, length, aspect ratio, etc.) of the representation 3004a and/or contour 3004b, a volume descriptor 3016 of the representation 3004a and/or contour 3004b, a color descriptor 3018 of representation 3004a (e.g., a color of the person’s hair, clothing, shoes, etc.), an attribute descriptor 3020 associated with the appearance of the representation 3004a and/or contour 3004b (e.g., an attribute such as “wearing a hat,” “carrying a child,” “pushing a stroller or cart,”), and the like.
  • a height descriptor 3012 e.g., a measure of the height in pixels or units of length
  • the calculated descriptors 3010 generally include values (e.g., scalar or vector values) which are calculated using the representation 3004a and/or contour 3004b and which do not necessarily correspond to an observable characteristic of the person.
  • the calculated descriptors 3010 may include image-based descriptors 3022 and model-based descriptors 3024.
  • Image- based descriptors 3022 may, for example, include any descriptor values (i.e., scalar and/or vector values) calculated from image 3002.
  • a texture operator such as a local binary pattern histogram (LBPH) algorithm may be used to calculate a vector associated with the representation 3004a.
  • LBPH local binary pattern histogram
  • This vector may be stored as a predetermined descriptor 2910 and measured at subsequent times as a descriptor 2912 for re- identification. Since the output of a texture operator, such as the LBPH algorithm may be large (i.e., in terms of the amount of memory required to store the output), it may be beneficial to select a subset of the output that is most useful for distinguishing people. Accordingly, in some cases, the tracking subsystem 2900 may select a portion of the initial data vector to include in the descriptor 2910, 2912. For example, principal component analysis may be used to select and retain a portion of the initial data vector that is most useful for effective person re-identification.
  • model -based descriptors 3024 are generally determined using a predefined model, such as an artificial neural network.
  • a model-based descriptor 3024 may be the output (e.g., a scalar value or vector) output by an artificial neural network trained to recognize people based on their corresponding representation 3004a and/or contour 3004b in top-view image 3002.
  • a Siamese neural network may be trained to associate representations 3004a and/or contours 3004b in top-view images 3002 with corresponding identifiers 2908 and subsequently employed for re-identification 2929.
  • the descriptor comparator 2914 of the tracking subsystem 2900 may be used to compare the measured descriptor 2912 to corresponding predetermined descriptors 2910 in order to determine the correct identity of a person being tracked.
  • the measured descriptor 2912 may be compared to a corresponding predetermined descriptor 2910 in order to determine the correct identifier 2908 for the person at position 2902.
  • the measured descriptor 2912 is a height descriptor 3012, it may be compared to predetermined height descriptors 2910 for identifiers 2908, or a subset of the identifiers 2908 determined using the candidate list 2906.
  • Comparing the descriptors 2910, 2912 may involve calculating a difference between scalar descriptor values (e.g., a difference in heights 3012, volumes 3018, etc.), determining whether a value of a measured descriptor 2912 is within a threshold range of the corresponding predetermined descriptor 2910 (e.g., determining if a color value 3018 of the measured descriptor 2912 is within a threshold range of the color value 3018 of the predetermined descriptor 2910), determining a cosine similarity value between vectors of the measured descriptor 2912 and the corresponding predetermined descriptor 2910 (e.g., determining a cosine similarity value between a measured vector calculated using a texture operator or neural network and a predetermined vector calculated in the same manner).
  • a difference between scalar descriptor values e.g., a difference in heights 3012, volumes 3018, etc.
  • only a subset of the predetermined descriptors 2910 are compared to the measured descriptor 2912.
  • the subset may be selected using the candidate list 2906 for the person at position 2902 that is being re-identified.
  • the person’s candidate list 2906 may indicate that only a subset (e.g., two, three, or so) of a larger number of identifiers 2908 are likely to be associated with the tracked object position 2902 that requires re-identification.
  • the comparator 2914 may update the candidate list 2906 for the person being re- identified at position 2902 (e.g., by sending update 2916).
  • a descriptor 2912 may be measured for an object that does not require re-identification (e.g., a person for which the candidate list 2906 indicates there is 100% probability that the person corresponds to a single identifier 2908).
  • measured identifiers 2912 may be used to update and/or maintain the predetermined descriptors 2910 for the person’s known identifier 2908 (e.g., by sending update 2918).
  • a predetermined descriptor 2910 may need to be updated if a person associated with the position 2902 has a change of appearance while moving through the space 102 (e.g., by adding or removing an article of clothing, by assuming a different posture, etc.).
  • FIG. 31A illustrates positions over a period of time of tracked people 3102, 3104, 3106, during an example operation of tracking system 2900.
  • the first person 3102 has a corresponding trajectory 3108 represented by the solid line in FIG. 31 A. Trajectory 3108 corresponds to the history of positions of person 3102 in the space 102 during the period of time.
  • the second person 3104 has a corresponding trajectory 3110 represented by the dashed-dotted line in FIG. 31 A. Trajectory 3110 corresponds to the history of positions of person 3104 in the space 102 during the period of time.
  • the third person 3106 has a corresponding trajectory 3112 represented by the dotted line in FIG. 31 A. Trajectory 3112 corresponds to the history of positions of person 3112 in the space 102 during the period of time.
  • predetermined descriptors 2910 are generally determined for the people 3102, 3104, 3106 and associated with the identifiers 2908 of the people 3102, 3104, 3106.
  • the predetermined descriptors 2910 are generally accessed when the identity of one or more of the people 3102, 3104, 3106 is not sufficiently certain (e.g., based on the corresponding candidate list 2906 and/or in response to a “collision event,” as described below) in order to re-identify the person 3102, 3104, 3106.
  • a collision event typically corresponds to an image frame in which contours associated with different people merge to form a single contour (e.g., the detection of merged contour 2220 shown in FIG. 22 may correspond to detecting a collision event).
  • a collision event corresponds to a person being located within a threshold distance of another person (see, e.g., distance 2718a and 2722 in FIG. 27 and the corresponding description above).
  • a collision event may correspond to any event that results in a person’s candidate list 2906 indicating that re-identification is needed (e.g., based on probabilities stored in the candidate list 2906 - see FIGS. 27-28 and the corresponding description above).
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 may determine a first height descriptor 3012 associated with a first height of the first person 3102, a first contour descriptor 3014 associated with a shape of the first person 3102, a first anchor descriptor 3024 corresponding to a first vector generated by an artificial neural network for the first person 3102, and/or any other descriptors 2910 described with respect to FIG. 30 above.
  • Each of these descriptors is stored for use as a predetermined descriptor 2910 for re identifying the first person 3102.
  • predetermined descriptors 2910 are associated with the first identifier (i.e., of identifiers 2908) of the first person 3102.
  • each of the descriptors 2910 described above may be determined again to update the predetermined descriptors 2910. For example, if person 3102 moves to a position in the space 102 that allows the person 3102 to be within a desired region-of- interest (e.g., region-of-interest 3006 of FIG. 30), new descriptors 2912 may be determined.
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 may use these new descriptors 2912 to update the previously determined descriptors 2910 (e.g., see update 2918 of FIG. 29). By intermittently updating the predetermined descriptors 2910, changes in the appearance of people being tracked can be accounted for (e.g., if a person puts on or removes an article of clothing, assumes a different posture, etc.).
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 detects a collision event between the first person 3102 and third person 3106 at position 3116 illustrated in FIG. 31 A.
  • the collision event may correspond to a first tracked position of the first person 3102 being within a threshold distance of a second tracked position of the third person 3106 at the first timestamp.
  • the collision event corresponds to a first contour associated with the first person 3102 merging with a third contour associated with the third person 3106 at the first timestamp.
  • the collision event may be associated with any occurrence which causes a highest value probability of a candidate list associated with the first person 3102 and/or the third person 3106 to fall below a threshold value (e.g., as described above with respect to view 2728 of FIG. 27).
  • a threshold value e.g., as described above with respect to view 2728 of FIG. 27.
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 receives a top- view image (e.g., top-view image 3002 of FIG. 30) from sensor 108.
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 determines, based on the top-view image, a first descriptor for the first person 3102.
  • the first descriptor includes at least one value associated with an observable, or calculated, characteristic of the first person 3104 (e.g., of representation 3004a and/or contour 3004b of FIG. 30).
  • the first descriptor may be a “lower-cost” descriptor that requires relative few processing resources to determine, as described above.
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 may be able to determine a lower-cost descriptor more efficiently than it can determine a higher-cost descriptor (e.g., a model-based descriptor 3024 described above with respect to FIG. 30). For instance, a first number of processing cores used to determine the first descriptor may be less than a second number of processing cores used to determine a model-based descriptor 3024 (e.g., using an artificial neural network). Thus, it may be beneficial to re-identify a person, whenever possible, using a lower- cost descriptor whenever possible.
  • the first descriptor may not be sufficient for re identifying the first person 3102.
  • a height descriptor 3012 generally cannot be used to distinguish between the people 3102, 3106.
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 may determine whether certain criteria are satisfied for distinguishing the first person 3102 from the third person 3106 based on the first descriptor 2912.
  • the criteria are not satisfied when a difference, determined during a time interval associated with the collision event (e.g., at a time at or near time ti), between the descriptor 2912 of the first person 3102 and a corresponding descriptor 2912 of the third person 3106 is less than a minimum value.
  • FIG. 3 IB illustrates the evaluation of these criteria based on the history of descriptor values for people 3102 and 3106 over time.
  • Plot 3150 shown in FIG. 3 IB, shows a first descriptor value 3152 for the first person 3102 over time and a second descriptor value 3154 for the third person 3106 over time.
  • descriptor values may fluctuate over time because of changes in the environment, the orientation of people relative to sensors 108, sensor variability, changes in appearance, etc.
  • the descriptor values 3152, 3154 may be associated with a shape descriptor 3014, a volume 3016, a contour-based descriptor 3022, or the like, as described above with respect to FIG. 30.
  • the descriptor values 3152, 3154 have a relatively large difference 3156 that is greater than the threshold difference 3160, illustrated in FIG. 3 IB.
  • the criteria are satisfied and the descriptor 2912 associated with descriptor values 3152, 3154 can generally be used to re-identify the first and third people 3102, 3106.
  • the descriptor comparator 2914 may compare the first descriptor 2912 for the first person 3102 to each of the corresponding predetermined descriptors 2910 (i.e., for all identifiers 2908). However, in some embodiments, comparator 2914 may compare the first descriptor 2912 for the first person 3102 to predetermined descriptors 2910 for only a select subset of the identifiers 2908. The subset may be selected using the candidate list 2906 for the person that is being re-identified (see, e.g., step 3208 of method 3200 described below with respect to FIG. 32).
  • the person’s candidate list 2906 may indicate that only a subset (e.g., two, three, or so) of a larger number of identifiers 2908 are likely to be associated with the tracked object position 2902 that requires re- identification.
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 may identify the predetermined descriptor 2910 that is most similar to the first descriptor 2912. For example, the tracking subsystem 2900 may determine that a first identifier 2908 corresponds to the first person 3102 by, for each member of the set (or the determined subset) of the predetermined descriptors 2910, calculating an absolute value of a difference in a value of the first descriptor 2912 and a value of the predetermined descriptor 2910. The first identifier 2908 may be selected as the identifier 2908 associated with the smallest absolute value.
  • a second collision event occurs at position 3118 between people 3102, 3106.
  • the descriptor values 3152, 3154 have a relatively small difference 3158 at time h (e.g., compared to difference 3156 at time ti), which is less than the threshold value 3160.
  • the descriptor 2912 associated with descriptor values 3152, 3154 generally cannot be used to re-identify the first and third people 3102, 3106, and the criteria for using the first descriptor 2912 are not satisfied. Instead, a different, and likely a “higher-cost” descriptor 2912 (e.g., a model-based descriptor 3024) should be used to re-identify the first and third people 3102, 3106 at time ⁇ 2.
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 determines a new descriptor 2912 for the first person 3102.
  • the new descriptor 2912 is typically a value or vector generated by an artificial neural network configured to identify people in top-view images (e.g., a model-based descriptor 3024 of FIG 30).
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 may determine, based on the new descriptor 2912, that a first identifier 2908 from the predetermined identifiers 2908 (or a subset determined based on the candidate list 2906, as described above) corresponds to the first person 3102.
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 may determine that the first identifier 2908 corresponds to the first person 3102 by, for each member of the set (or subset) of predetermined identifiers 2908, calculating an absolute value of a difference in a value of the first identifier 2908 and a value of the predetermined descriptors 2910.
  • the first identifier 2908 may be selected as the identifier 2908 associated with the smallest absolute value.
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 may determine a measured descriptor 2912 for all of the “candidate identifiers” of the first person 3102.
  • the candidate identifiers generally refer to the identifiers 2908 of people (e.g., or other tracked objects) that are known to be associated with identifiers 2908 appearing in the candidate list 2906 of the first person 3102 (e.g., as described above with respect to FIGS. 27 and 28).
  • the candidate identifiers may be identifiers 2908 of tracked people (i.e., at tracked object positions 2902) that appear in the candidate list 2906 of the person being re-identified.
  • FIG. 31C illustrates how predetermined descriptors 3162, 3164, 3166 for a first, second, and third identifier 2908 may be compared to each of the measured descriptors 3168, 3170, 3172 for people 3102, 3104, 3106.
  • the comparison may involve calculating a cosine similarity value between a vectors associated with the descriptors. Based on the results of the comparison, each person 3102, 3104, 3106 is assigned the identifier 2908 corresponding to the best-matching predetermined descriptor 3162, 3164, 3166.
  • a best matching descriptor may correspond to a highest cosine similarity value (i.e., nearest to one).
  • FIG. 32 illustrates a method 3200 for re-identifying tracked people using tracking subsystem 2900 illustrated in FIG. 29 and described above.
  • the method 3200 may begin at step 3202 where the tracking subsystem 2900 receives top-view image frames from one or more sensors 108.
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 tracks a first person 3102 and one or more other people (e.g., people 3104, 3106) in the space 102 using at least a portion of the top-view images generated by the sensors 108. For instance, tracking may be performed as described above with respect to FIGS. 24-26, or using any appropriate object tracking algorithm.
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 may periodically determine updated predetermined descriptors associated with the identifiers 2908 (e.g., as described with respect to update 2918 of FIG. 29). In some embodiments, the tracking subsystem 2900, in response to determining the updated descriptors, determines that one or more of the updated predetermined descriptors is different by at least a threshold amount from a corresponding previously predetermined descriptor 2910. In this case, the tracking subsystem 2900 may save both the updated descriptor and the corresponding previously predetermined descriptor 2910. This may allow for improved re-identification when characteristics of the people being tracked may change intermittently during tracking.
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 determines whether re-identification of the first tracked person 3102 is needed. This may be based on a determination that contours have merged in an image frame (e.g., as illustrated by merged contour 2220 of FIG. 22) or on a determination that a first person 3102 and a second person 3104 are within a threshold distance (e.g., distance 2918b of FIG. 29) of each other, as described above. In some embodiments, a candidate list 2906 may be used to determine that re- identification of the first person 3102 is required.
  • a threshold value e.g. 70%
  • re-identification may be needed (see also FIGS. 27-28 and the corresponding description above). If re-identification is not needed, the tracking subsystem 2900 generally continues to track people in the space (e.g., by returning to step 3204).
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 may determine candidate identifiers for the first tracked person 3102 at step 3208.
  • the candidate identifiers generally include a subset of all of the identifiers 2908 associated with tracked people in the space 102, and the candidate identifiers may be determined based on the candidate list 2906 for the first tracked person 3102.
  • the candidate identifiers are a subset of the identifiers 2906 which are most likely to include the correct identifier 2908 for the first tracked person 3102 based on a history of movements of the first tracked person 3102 and interactions of the first tracked person 3102 with the one or more other tracked people 3104, 3106 in the space 102 (e.g., based on the candidate list 2906 that is updated in response to these movements and interactions).
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 determines a first descriptor 2912 for the first tracked person 3102.
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 may receive, from a first sensor 108, a first top-view image of the first person 3102 (e.g., such as image 3002 of FIG. 30).
  • the image 3002 used to determine the descriptor 2912 includes the representation 3004a of the object within a region-of-interest 3006 within the full frame of the image 3002. This may provide for more reliable descriptor 2912 determination.
  • the image data 2904 include depth data (i.e., image data at different depths).
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 may determine the descriptor 2912 based on a depth region-of-interest, where the depth region-of-interest corresponds to depths in the image associated with the head of person 3102.
  • descriptors 2912 may be determined that are associated with characteristics or features of the head of the person 3102.
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 may determine whether the first descriptor 2912 can be used to distinguish the first person 3102 from the candidate identifiers (e.g., one or both of people 3104, 3106) by, for example, determining whether certain criteria are satisfied for distinguishing the first person 3102 from the candidates based on the first descriptor 2912. In some embodiments, the criteria are not satisfied when a difference, determined during a time interval associated with the collision event, between the first descriptor 2912 and corresponding descriptors 2910 of the candidates is less than a minimum value, as described in greater detail above with respect to FIGS. 31 A,B.
  • the method 3200 proceeds to step 3214 at which point the tracking subsystem 2900 determines an updated identifier for the first person 3102 based on the first descriptor 2912. For example, the tracking subsystem 2900 may compare (e.g., using comparator 2914) the first descriptor 2912 to the set of predetermined descriptors 2910 that are associated with the candidate objects determined for the first person 3102 at step 3208.
  • the first descriptor 2912 is a data vector associated with characteristics of the first person in the image (e.g., a vector determined using a texture operator such as the LBPH algorithm), and each of the predetermined descriptors 2910 includes a corresponding predetermined data vector (e.g., determined for each tracked pers 3102, 3104, 3106 upon entering the space 102).
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 compares the first descriptor 2912 to each of the predetermined descriptors 2910 associated with the candidate objects by calculating a cosine similarity value between the first data vector and each of the predetermined data vectors.
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 determines the updated identifier as the identifier 2908 of the candidate object with the cosine similarity value nearest one (i.e., the vector that is most “similar” to the vector of the first descriptor 2912).
  • the identifiers 2908 of the other tracked people 3104, 3106 may be updated as appropriate by updating other people’ s candidate lists 2906. For example, if the first tracked person 3102 was found to be associated with an identifier 2908 that was previously associated with the second tracked person 3104. Steps 3208 to 3214 may be repeated for the second person 3104 to determine the correct identifier 2908 for the second person 3104.
  • the identifiers 2908 for the first person 3102 when the identifier 2908 for the first person 3102 is updated, the identifiers 2908 for people (e.g., one or both of people 3104 and 3106) that are associated with the first person’s candidate list 2906 are also updated at step 3216.
  • the candidate list 2906 of the first person 3102 may have a non-zero probability that the first person 3102 is associated with a second identifier 2908 originally linked to the second person 3104 and a third probability that the first person 3102 is associated with a third identifier 2908 originally linked to the third person 3106.
  • the identifiers 2908 of the second and third people 3104, 3106 may also be updated according to steps 3208-3214.
  • the method 3200 proceeds to step 3218 to determine a second descriptor 2912 for the first person 3102.
  • the second descriptor 2912 may be a “higher-level” descriptor such as a model-based descriptor 3024 of FIG. 30).
  • the second descriptor 2912 may be less efficient (e.g., in terms of processing resources required) to determine than the first descriptor 2912.
  • the second descriptor 2912 may be more effective and reliable, in some cases, for distinguishing between tracked people.
  • the tracking system 2900 determines whether the second descriptor 2912 can be used to distinguish the first person 3102 from the candidates (from step 3218) using the same or a similar approach to that described above with respect to step 3212. For example, the tracking subsystem 2900 may determine if the cosine similarity values between the second descriptor 2912 and the predetermined descriptors 2910 are greater than a threshold cosine similarity value (e.g., of 0.5). If the cosine similarity value is greater than the threshold, the second descriptor 2912 generally can be used.
  • a threshold cosine similarity value e.g., of 0.5
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 proceeds to step 3222, and the tracking subsystem 2900 determines the identifier 2908 for the first person 3102 based on the second descriptor 2912 and updates the candidate list 2906 for the first person 3102 accordingly.
  • the identifier 2908 for the first person 3102 may be determined as described above with respect to step 3214 (e.g., by calculating a cosine similarity value between a vector corresponding to the first descriptor 2912 and previously determined vectors associated with the predetermined descriptors 2910).
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 then proceeds to step 3216 described above to update identifiers 2908 (i.e., via candidate lists 2906) of other tracked people 3104, 3106 as appropriate.
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 proceeds to step 3224, and the tracking subsystem 2900 determines a descriptor 2912 for all of the first person 3102 and all of the candidates.
  • a measured descriptor 2912 is determined for all people associated with the identifiers 2908 appearing in the candidate list 2906 of the first person 3102 (e.g., as described above with respect to FIG. 31C).
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 compares the second descriptor 2912 to predetermined descriptors 2910 associated with all people related to the candidate list 2906 of the first person 3102.
  • the tracking subsystem 2900 may determine a second cosine similarity value between a second data vector determined using an artificial neural network and each corresponding vector from the predetermined descriptor values 2910 for the candidates (e.g., as illustrated in FIG. 31C, described above). The tracking subsystem 2900 then proceeds to step 3228 to determine and update the identifiers 2908 of all candidates based on the comparison at step 3226 before continuing to track people 3102, 3104, 3106 in the space 102 (e.g., by returning to step 3204).
  • Method 3200 may include more, fewer, or other steps. For example, steps may be performed in parallel or in any suitable order. While at times discussed as tracking system 2900 (e.g., by server 106 and/or client(s) 105) or components thereof performing steps, any suitable system or components of the system may perform one or more steps of the method 3200.
  • Action detection for assigning items to the correct person
  • the item associated with the activated weight sensor 110 may be assigned to the person nearest the rack 112. However, in some cases, two or more people may be near the rack 112 and it may not be clear who picked up the item. Accordingly, further action may be required to properly assign the item to the correct person.
  • a cascade of algorithms may be employed to assign an item to the correct person.
  • the cascade may be triggered, for example, by (i) the proximity of two or more people to the rack 112, (ii) a hand crossing into the zone (or a “virtual curtain”) adjacent to the rack (e.g., see zone 3324 of FIG. 33B and corresponding description below) and/or, (iii) a weight signal indicating an item was removed from the rack 112.
  • a unique contour-based approach may be used to assign an item to the correct person.
  • a contour may be “dilated” from a head height to a lower height in order to determine which person’s arm reached into the rack 112 to pick up the item.
  • a more computationally expensive approach e.g., involving neural network-based pose estimation
  • the tacking system 100 upon detecting that more than one person may have picked up an item, may store a set of buffer frames that are most likely to contain useful information for effectively assigning the item to the correct person.
  • the stored buffer frames may correspond to brief time intervals when a portion of a person enters the zone adjacent to a rack 112 (e.g., zone 3324 of FIG. 33B, described above) and/or when the person exits this zone.
  • the tracking system 100 may store further buffer frames in order to track the item through the space 102 after it exits the rack 112.
  • the tracking system 100 determines which person is closer to the stopped item, and the item is generally assigned to the nearest person. This process may be repeated until the item is confidently assigned to the correct person.
  • FIG. 33A illustrates an example scenario in which a first person 3302 and a second person 3304 are near a rack 112 storing items 3306a-c. Each item 3306a-c is stored on corresponding weight sensors llOa-c.
  • a sensor 108 which is communicatively coupled to the tracking subsystem 3300 (i.e., to the server 106 and/or client(s) 105), generates a top-view depth image 3308 for a field-of-view 3310 which includes the rack 112 and people 3302, 3304.
  • the top-view depth image 3308 includes a representation 112a of the rack 112 and representations 3302a, 3304a of the first and second people 3302, 3304, respectively.
  • the rack 112 (e.g., or its representation 112a) may be divided into three zones 3312a-c which correspond to the locations of weight sensors 1 lOa-c and the associated items 3306a-c, respectively.
  • one of the people 3302, 3304 picks up an item 3306c from weight sensor 110c, and tracking subsystem 3300 receives a trigger signal 3314 indicating an item 3306c has been removed from the rack 112.
  • the tracking subsystem 3300 includes the client(s) 105 and server 106 described above with respect to FIG. 1.
  • the trigger signal 3314 may indicate the change in weight caused by the item 3306c being removed from sensor 110c.
  • the server 106 accesses the top-view image 3308, which may correspond to a time at, just prior to, and/or just following the time the trigger signal 3314 was received.
  • the trigger signal 3314 may also or alternatively be associated with the tracking system 100 detecting a person 3302, 3304 entering a zone adjacent to the rack (e.g., as described with respect to the “virtual curtain” of FIGS. 12-15 above and/or zone 3324 described in greater detail below) to determine to which person 3302, 3304 the item 3306c should be assigned. Since representations 3302a and 3304a indicate that both people 3302, 3304 are near the rack 112, further analysis is required to assign item 3306c to the correct person 3302, 3304. Initially, the tracking system 100 may determine if an arm of either person 3302 or 3304 may be reaching toward zone 3312c to pick up item 3306c.
  • the tracking system 100 may use a contour-dilation approach to determine whether person 3302 or 3304 picked up item 3306c.
  • FIG. 33B illustrates implementation of a contour-dilation approach to assigning item 3306c to the correct person 3302 or 3304.
  • contour dilation involves iterative dilation of a first contour associated with the first person 3302 and a second contour associated with the second person 3304 from a first smaller depth to a second larger depth.
  • the dilated contour that crosses into the zone 3324 adjacent to the rack 112 first may correspond to the person 3302, 3304 that picked up the item 3306c.
  • Dilated contours may need to satisfy certain criteria to ensure that the results of the contour-dilation approach should be used for item assignment.
  • the criteria may include a requirement that a portion of a contour entering the zone 3324 adjacent to the rack 112 is associated with either the first person 3302 or the second person 3304 within a maximum number of iterative dilations, as is described in greater detail with respect to the contour-detection views 3320, 3326, 3328, and 3332 shown in FIG. 33B. If these criteria are not satisfied, another method should be used to determine which person 3302 or 3304 picked up item 3306c.
  • FIG. 33B shows a view 3320, which includes a contour 3302b detected at a first depth in the top-view image 3308.
  • the first depth may correspond to an approximate head height of a typical person 3322 expected to be tracked in the space 102, as illustrated in FIG. 33B.
  • Contour 3302b does not enter or contact the zone 3324 which corresponds to the location of a space adjacent to the front of the rack 112 (e.g., as described with respect to the “virtual curtain” of FIGS. 12-15 above). Therefore, the tracking system 100 proceeds to a second depth in image 3308 and detects contours 3302c and 3304b shown in view 3326. The second depth is greater than the first depth of view 3320.
  • the tracking system 100 proceeds to a third depth in the image 3308 and detects contours 3302d and 3304c, as shown in view 3328.
  • the third depth is greater than the second depth, as illustrated with respect to person 3322 in FIG. 33B.
  • contour 3302d appears to enter or touch the edge of zone 3324. Accordingly, the tracking system 100 may determine that the first person 3302, who is associated with contour 3302d, should be assigned the item 3306c. In some embodiments, after initially assigning the item 3306c to person 3302, the tracking system 100 may project an “arm segment” 3330 to determine whether the arm segment 3330 enters the appropriate zone 3312c that is associated with item 3306c.
  • the arm segment 3330 generally corresponds to the expected position of the person’s extended arm in the space occluded from view by the rack 112. If the location of the projected arm segment 3330 does not correspond with an expected location of item 3306c (e.g., a location within zone 3312c), the item is not assigned to (or is unassigned from) the first person 3302.
  • FIG. 3332 Another view 3332 at a further increased fourth depth shows a contour 3302e and contour 3304d. Each of these contours 3302e and 3304d appear to enter or touch the edge of zone 3324. However, since the dilated contours associated with the first person 3302 (reflected in contours 3302b-e) entered or touched zone 3324 within fewer iterations (or at a smaller depth) than did the dilated contours associated with the second person 3304 (reflected in contours 3304b-d), the item 3306c is generally assigned to the first person 3302.
  • a contour may need to enter zone 3324 within a maximum number of dilations (e.g., or before a maximum depth is reached). For example, if the item 3306c was not assigned by the fourth depth, the tracking system 100 may have ended the contour-dilation method and moved on to another approach to assigning the item 3306c, as described below.
  • the contour-dilation approach illustrated in FIG. 33B fails to correctly assign item 3306c to the correct person 3302, 3304.
  • the criteria described above may not be satisfied (e.g., a maximum depth or number of iterations may be exceeded) or dilated contours associated with the different people 3302 or 3304 may merge, rendering the results of contour-dilation unusable.
  • the tracking system 100 may employ another strategy to determine which person 3302, 3304c picked up item 3306c.
  • the tracking system 100 may use a pose estimation algorithm to determine a pose of each person 3302, 3304.
  • FIG. 33C illustrates an example output of a pose-estimation algorithm which includes a first “skeleton” 3302f for the first person 3302 and a second “skeleton” 3304e for the second person 3304.
  • the first skeleton 3302f may be assigned a “reaching pose” because an arm of the skeleton appears to be reaching outward. This reaching pose may indicate that the person 3302 is reaching to pick up item 3306c.
  • the second skeleton 3304e does not appear to be reaching to pick up item 3306c. Since only the first skeleton 3302f appears to be reaching for the item 3306c, the tracking system 100 may assign the item 3306c to the first person 3302.
  • a different method of item assignment may be implemented by the tracking system 100 (e.g., by tracking the item 3306c through the space 102, as described below with respect to FIGS. 36-37).
  • FIG. 34 illustrates a method 3400 for assigning an item 3306c to a person 3302 or 3304 using tracking system 100.
  • the method 3400 may begin at step 3402 where the tracking system 100 receives an image feed comprising frames of top-view images generated by the sensor 108 and weight measurements from weight sensors 1 lOa-c.
  • the tracking system 100 detects an event associated with picking up an item 33106c.
  • the event may be based on a portion of a person 3302, 3304 entering the zone adjacent to the rack 112 (e.g., zone 3324 of FIG. 33B) and/or a change of weight associated with the item 33106c being removed from the corresponding weight sensor 110c.
  • the tracking system 100 determines whether more than one person 3302, 3304 may be associated with the detected event (e.g., as in the example scenario illustrated in FIG. 33A, described above). For example, this determination may be based on distances between the people and the rack 112, an inter-person distance between the people, a relative orientation between the people and the rack 112 (e.g., a person 3302, 3304 not facing the rack 112 may not be candidate for picking up the item 33106c). If only one person 3302, 3304 may be associated with the event, that person 3302, 3304 is associated with the item 3306c at step 3408. For example, the item 3306c may be assigned to the nearest person 3302, 3304, as described with respect to FIGS. 12-14 above.
  • the item 3306c is assigned to the person 3302, 3304 determined to be associated with the event detected at step 3404. For example, the item 3306c may be added to a digital cart associated with the person 3302, 3304. Generally, if the action (i.e., picking up the item 3306c) was determined to have been performed by the first person 3302, the action (and the associated item 3306c) is assigned to the first person 3302, and, if the action was determined to have been performed by the second person 3304, the action (and associated item 3306c) is assigned to the second person 3304.
  • the action i.e., picking up the item 3306c
  • a select set of buffer frames of top-view images generated by sensor 108 may be stored at step 3412.
  • the stored buffer frames may include only three or fewer frames of top-view images following a triggering event.
  • the triggering event may be associated with the person 3302, 3304 entering the zone adjacent to the rack 112 (e.g., zone 3324 of FIG. 33B), the portion of the person 3302, 3304 exiting the zone adjacent to the rack 112 (e.g., zone 3324 of FIG. 33B), and/or a change in weight determined by a weight sensor l lOa-c.
  • the buffer frames may include image frames from the time a change in weight was reported by a weight sensor 110 until the person 3302, 3304 exits the zone adjacent to the rack 112 (e.g., zone 3324 of FIG. 33B).
  • the buffer frames generally include a subset of all possible frames available from the sensor 108. As such, by storing, and subsequently analyzing, only these stored buffer frames (or a portion of the stored buffer frames), the tracking system 100 may assign actions (e.g., and an associated item 106a-c) to a correct person 3302, 3304 more efficiently (e.g., in terms of the use of memory and processing resources) than was possible using previous technology.
  • a region-of-interest from the images may be accessed. For example, following storing the buffer frames, the tracking system 100 may determine a region-of-interest of the top-view images to retain. For example, the tracking system 100 may only store a region near the center of each view (e.g., region 3006 illustrated in FIG. 30 and described above).
  • the tracking system 100 determines, using at least one of the buffer frames stored at step 3412 and a first action-detection algorithm, whether an action associated with the detected event was performed by the first person 3302 or the second person 3304.
  • the first action-detection algorithm is generally configured to detect the action based on characteristics of one or more contours in the stored buffer frames.
  • the first action-detection algorithm may be the contour-dilation algorithm described above with respect to FIG. 33B.
  • An example implementation of a contour- based action-detection method is also described in greater detail below with respect to method 3500 illustrated in FIG. 35.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine a subset of the buffer frames to use with the first action-detection algorithm. For example, the subset may correspond to when the person 3302, 3304 enters the zone adjacent to the rack 112 (e.g., zone 3324 illustrated in FIG. 33B).
  • the tracking system 100 determines whether results of the first action-detection algorithm satisfy criteria indicating that the first algorithm is appropriate for determining which person 3302, 3304 is associated with the event (i.e., picking up item 3306c, in this example).
  • the criteria may be a requirement to identify the person 3302, 3304 associated with the event within a threshold number of dilations (e.g., before reaching a maximum depth). Whether the criteria are satisfied at step 3416 may be based at least in part on the number of iterations required to implement the first action-detection algorithm. If the criteria are satisfied at step 3418, the tracking system 100 proceeds to step 3410 and assigns the item 3306c to the person 3302, 3304 associated with the event determined at step 3416.
  • the tracking system 100 proceeds to step 3420 and uses a different action-detection algorithm to determine whether the action associated with the event detected at step 3404 was performed by the first person 3302 or the second person 3304. This may be performed by applying a second action-detection algorithm to at least one of the buffer frames selected at step 3412.
  • the second action-detection algorithm may be configured to detect the action using an artificial neural network.
  • the second algorithm may be a pose estimation algorithm used to determine whether a pose of the first person 3302 or second person 3304 corresponds to the action (e.g., as described above with respect to FIG. 33C).
  • the tracking system 100 may determine a second subset of the buffer frames to use with the second action detection algorithm.
  • the subset may correspond to the time when the weight change is reported by the weight sensor 110.
  • the pose of each person 3302, 3304 at the time of the weight change may provide a good indication of which person 3302, 3304 picked up the item 3306c.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine whether the second algorithm satisfies criteria indicating that the second algorithm is appropriate for determining which person 3302, 3304 is associated with the event (i.e., with picking up item 3306c). For example, if the poses (e.g., determined from skeletons 3302f and 3304e of FIG. 33C, described above) of each person 3302, 3304 still suggest that either person 3302, 3304 could have picked up the item 3306c, the criteria may not be satisfied, and the tracking system 100 proceeds to step 3424 to assign the object using another approach (e.g., by tracking movement of the item 3306a-c through the space 102, as described in greater detail below with respect to FIGS. 36 and 37).
  • the poses e.g., determined from skeletons 3302f and 3304e of FIG. 33C, described above
  • the criteria may not be satisfied, and the tracking system 100 proceeds to step 3424 to assign the object using another approach (e.g., by tracking movement of the item 3306a-c through
  • Method 3400 may include more, fewer, or other steps. For example, steps may be performed in parallel or in any suitable order. While at times discussed as tracking system 100 or components thereof performing steps, any suitable system or components of the system may perform one or more steps of the method 3400.
  • the first action-detection algorithm of step 3416 may involve iterative contour dilation to determine which person 3302, 3304 is reaching to pick up an item 3306a-c from rack 112.
  • FIG. 35 illustrates an example method 3500 of contour dilation-based item assignment.
  • the method 3500 may begin from step 3416 of FIG. 34, described above, and proceed to step 3502.
  • the tracking system 100 determines whether a contour is detected at a first depth (e.g., the first depth of FIG. 33B described above). For example, in the example illustrated in FIG. 33B, contour 3302b is detected at the first depth. If a contour is not detected, the tracking system 100 proceeds to step 3504 to determine if the maximum depth (e.g., the fourth depth of FIG. 33B) has been reached. If the maximum depth has not been reached, the tracking system 100 iterates (i.e., moves) to the next depth in the image at step 3506. Otherwise, if the maximum depth has been reached, method 3500 ends.
  • a first depth
  • the tracking system 100 proceeds to step 3508 and determines whether a portion of the detected contour overlaps, enters, or otherwise contacts the zone adjacent to the rack 112 (e.g., zone 3324 illustrated in FIG. 33B). In some embodiments, the tracking system 100 determines if a projected arm segment (e.g., arm segment 3330 of FIG. 33B) of a contour extends into an appropriate zone 3312a-c of the rack 112. If no portion of the contour extends into the zone adjacent to the rack 112, the tracking system 100 determines whether the maximum depth has been reached at step 3504. If the maximum depth has not been reached, the tracking system 100 iterates to the next larger depth and returns to step 3502.
  • a projected arm segment e.g., arm segment 3330 of FIG. 33B
  • the tracking system 100 determines the number of iterations (i.e., the number of times step 3506 was performed) before the contour was determined to have entered the zone adjacent to the rack 112 at step 3508.
  • this number of iterations is compared to the number of iterations for a second (i.e., different) detected contour. For example, steps 3502 to 35010 may be repeated to determine the number of iterations (at step 3506) for the second contour to enter the zone adjacent to the rack 112. If the number of iterations is less than that of the second contour, the item is assigned to the first person 3302 at step 3514. Otherwise, the item may be assigned to the second person 3304 at step 3516. For example, as described above with respect to FIG.
  • the first dilated contours 3302b-e entered the zone 3324 adjacent to the rack 112 within fewer iterations than did the second dilated contours 3304b.
  • the item is assigned to the person 3302 associated with the first contour 3302b-d.
  • a dilated contour i.e., the contour generated via two or more passes through step 3506 must satisfy certain criteria in order for it to be used for assigning an item. For instance, a contour may need to enter the zone adjacent to the rack within a maximum number of dilations (e.g., or before a maximum depth is reached), as described above. As another example, a dilated contour may need to include less than a threshold number of pixels. If a contour is too large it may be a “merged contour” that is associated with two closely spaced people (see FIG. 22 and the corresponding description above).
  • Method 3500 may include more, fewer, or other steps. For example, steps may be performed in parallel or in any suitable order. While at times discussed as tracking system 100 or components thereof performing steps, any suitable system or components of the system may perform one or more steps of the method 3500.
  • an item 3306a-c cannot be assigned to the correct person even using a higher-level algorithm such as the artificial neural network- based pose estimation described above with respect to FIG.s 33C and 34.
  • the position of the item 3306c after it exits the rack 112 may be tracked in order to assign the item 3306c to the correct person 3302, 3304.
  • the tracking system 100 does this by tracking the item 3306c after it exits the rack 112, identifying a position where the item stops moving, and determining which person 3302, 3304 is nearest to the stopped item 3306c.
  • the nearest person 3302, 3304 is generally assigned the item 3306c.
  • FIGS. 36A,B illustrate this item tracking-based approach to item assignment.
  • FIG. 36A shows a top-view image 3602 generated by a sensor 108.
  • FIG. 36B shows a plot 3620 of the item’s velocity 3622 over time.
  • image 3602 includes a representation of a person 3604 holding an item 3606 which has just exited a zone 3608 adjacent to a rack 112. Since a representation of a second person 3610 may also have been associated with picking up the item 3606, item-based tracking is required to properly assign the item 3606 to the correct person 3604, 3610 (e.g., as described above with respect people 3302, 3304 and item 3306c for FIGS. 33-35).
  • Tracking system 100 may (i) track the position of the item 3606 over time after the item 3606 exits the rack 112, as illustrated in tracking views 3610 and 3616, and (ii) determine the velocity of the item 3606, as shown in curve 3622 of plot 3620 in FIG. 36B.
  • the velocity 3622 shown in FIG. 36B is zero at the inflection points corresponding to a first stopped time (t s topped,i) and a second stopped time (t s topped,2). More generally, the time when the item 3606 is stopped may correspond to a time when the velocity 3622 is less than a threshold velocity 3624.
  • Tracking view 3612 of FIG. 36A shows the position 3604a of the first person 3604, a position 3606a of item 3606, and a position 3610a of the second person 3610 at the first stopped time.
  • the positions 3604a, 3610a are both near the position 3606a of the item 3606. Accordingly, the tracking system 100 may not be able to confidently assign item 3606 to the correct person 3604 or 3610. Thus, the tracking system 100 continues to track the item 3606.
  • Tracking view 3614 shows the position 3604a of the first person 3604, the position 3606a of the item 3606, and the position 3610a of the second person 3610 at the second stopped time (t s topped,2). Since only the position 3604a of the first person 3604 is near the position 3606a of the item 3606, the item 3606 is assigned to the first person 3604.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine, at each stopped time, a first distance 3626 between the stopped item 3606 and the first person 3604 and a second distance 3628 between the stopped item 3606 and the second person 3610. Using these distances 3626, 3628, the tracking system 100 determines whether the stopped position of the item 3606 in the first frame is nearer the first person 3604 or nearer the second person 3610 and whether the distance 3626, 3628 is less than a threshold distance 3630. At the first stopped time of view 3612, both distances 3626, 3628 are less than the threshold distance 3630. Thus, the tracking system 100 cannot reliably determine which person 3604, 3610 should be assigned the item 3606. In contrast, at the second stopped time of view 3614, only the first distance 3626 is less than the threshold distance 3630. Therefore, the tracking system may assign the item 3606 to the first person 3604 at the second stopped time.
  • FIG. 37 illustrates an example method 3700 of assigning an item 3606 to a person 3604 or 3610 based on item tracking using tracking system 100.
  • Method 3700 may begin at step 3424 of method 3400 illustrated in FIG. 34 and described above and proceed to step 3702.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine that item tracking is needed (e.g., because the action-detection based approaches described above with respect to FIGS. 33-35 were unsuccessful).
  • the tracking system 100 stores and/or accesses buffer frames of top-view images generated by sensor 108.
  • the buffer frames generally include frames from a time period following a portion of the person 3604 or 3610 exiting the zone 3608 adjacent to the rack 11236.
  • the tracking system 100 tracks, in the stored frames, a position of the item 3606.
  • the position may be a local pixel position associated with the sensor 108 (e.g., determined by client 105) or a global physical position in the space 102 (e.g., determined by server 106 using an appropriate homography).
  • the item 3606 may include a visually observable tag that can be viewed by the sensor 108 and detected and tracked by the tracking system 100 using the tag.
  • the item 3606 may be detected by the tracking system 100 using a machine learning algorithm.
  • the machine learning algorithm may be trained using synthetic data (e.g., artificial image data that can be used to train the algorithm).
  • the tracking system 100 determines whether a velocity 3622 of the item 3606 is less than a threshold velocity 3624.
  • the velocity 3622 may be calculated, based on the tracked position of the item 3606.
  • the distance moved between frames may be used to calculate a velocity 3622 of the item 3606.
  • a particle filter tracker e.g., as described above with respect to FIGS. 24-26
  • the tracking system 100 identifies, a frame in which the velocity 3622 of the item 3606 is less than the threshold velocity 3624 and proceeds to step 3710. Otherwise, the tracking system 100 continues to track the item 3606 at step 3706.
  • the tracking system 100 determines, in the identified frame, a first distance 3626 between the stopped item 3606 and a first person 3604 and a second distance 3628 between the stopped item 3606 and a second person 3610. Using these distances 3626, 3628, the tracking system 100 determines, at step 3712, whether the stopped position of the item 3606 in the first frame is nearer the first person 3604 or nearer the second person 3610 and whether the distance 3626, 3628 is less than a threshold distance 3630. In general, in order for the item 3606 to be assigned to the first person 3604, the item 3606 should be within the threshold distance 3630 from the first person 3604, indicating the person is likely holding the item 3606, and closer to the first person 3604 than to the second person 3610.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine that the stopped position is a first distance 3626 away from the first person 3604 and a second distance 3628 away from the second person 3610.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine an absolute value of a difference between the first distance 3626 and the second distance 3628 and may compare the absolute value to a threshold distance 3630. If the absolute value is less than the threshold distance 3630, the tracking system returns to step 3706 and continues tracking the item 3606. Otherwise, the tracking system 100 is greater than the threshold distance 3630 and the item 3606 is sufficiently close to the first person 3604, the tracking system proceeds to step 3714 and assigns the item 3606 to the first person 3604. Modifications, additions, or omissions may be made to method 3700 depicted in FIG. 37. Method 3700 may include more, fewer, or other steps. For example, steps may be performed in parallel or in any suitable order. While at times discussed as tracking system 100 or components thereof performing steps, any suitable system or components of the system may perform one or more steps of the method 3700.
  • FIG. 38 is an embodiment of a device 3800 (e.g. a server 106 or a client 105) configured to track objects and people within a space 102.
  • the device 3800 comprises a processor 3802, a memory 3804, and a network interface 3806.
  • the device 3800 may be configured as shown or in any other suitable configuration.
  • the processor 3802 comprises one or more processors operably coupled to the memory 3804.
  • the processor 3802 is any electronic circuitry including, but not limited to, state machines, one or more central processing unit (CPU) chips, logic units, cores (e.g. a multi-core processor), field-programmable gate array (FPGAs), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), or digital signal processors (DSPs).
  • the processor 3802 may be a programmable logic device, a microcontroller, a microprocessor, or any suitable combination of the preceding.
  • the processor 3802 is communicatively coupled to and in signal communication with the memory 3804.
  • the one or more processors are configured to process data and may be implemented in hardware or software.
  • the processor 3802 may be 8-bit, 16-bit, 32-bit, 64-bit or of any other suitable architecture.
  • the processor 3802 may include an arithmetic logic unit (ALU) for performing arithmetic and logic operations, processor registers that supply operands to the ALU and store the results of ALU operations, and a control unit that fetches instructions from memory and executes them by directing the coordinated operations of the ALU, registers and other components.
  • ALU arithmetic logic unit
  • the one or more processors are configured to implement various instructions.
  • the one or more processors are configured to execute instructions to implement a tracking engine 3808.
  • processor 3802 may be a special purpose computer designed to implement the functions disclosed herein.
  • the tracking engine 3808 is implemented using logic units, FPGAs, ASICs, DSPs, or any other suitable hardware.
  • the tracking engine 3808 is configured operate as described in FIGS. 1-18.
  • the tracking engine 3808 may be configured to perform the steps of methods 200, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1500, 1600, and 1700 as described in FIGS. 2, 6, 8, 10, 12, 15, 16, and 17, respectively.
  • the memory 3804 comprises one or more disks, tape drives, or solid-state drives, and may be used as an over-flow data storage device, to store programs when such programs are selected for execution, and to store instructions and data that are read during program execution.
  • the memory 3804 may be volatile or non-volatile and may comprise read-only memory (ROM), random-access memory (RAM), ternary content- addressable memory (TCAM), dynamic random-access memory (DRAM), and static random-access memory (SRAM).
  • the memory 3804 is operable to store tracking instructions 3810, homographies 118, marker grid information 716, marker dictionaries 718, pixel location information 908, adjacency lists 1114, tracking lists 1112, digital carts 1410, item maps 1308, and/or any other data or instructions.
  • the tracking instructions 3810 may comprise any suitable set of instructions, logic, rules, or code operable to execute the tracking engine 3808.
  • the homographies 118 are configured as described in FIGS. 2-5B.
  • the marker grid information 716 is configured as described in FIGS. 6-7.
  • the marker dictionaries 718 are configured as described in FIGS. 6-7.
  • the pixel location information 908 is configured as described in FIGS. 8-9.
  • the adjacency lists 1114 are configured as described in FIGS. 10-11.
  • the tracking lists 1112 are configured as described in FIGS. 10-11.
  • the digital carts 1410 are configured as described in FIGS. 12-18.
  • the item maps 1308 are configured as described in FIGS. 12-18.
  • the network interface 3806 is configured to enable wired and/or wireless communications.
  • the network interface 3806 is configured to communicate data between the device 3800 and other, systems, or domain.
  • the network interface 3806 may comprise a WIFI interface, a LAN interface, a WAN interface, a modem, a switch, or a router.
  • the processor 3802 is configured to send and receive data using the network interface 3806.
  • the network interface 3806 may be configured to use any suitable type of communication protocol as would be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • FIG. 39 illustrates an example tracking system 100 .
  • the tracking system 100 of FIG. 39 may correspond to the tracking system 100 of FIG. 1 and further include kiosks 3904 and 3916 in addition to components of the tracking system 100 of FIG. 1.
  • the store 122 illustrated in FIG. 39 may be a perspective view of the space 102 illustrated in FIG. 1.
  • the tracking system 100 is configured to facilitate operation of a cashierless store 122.
  • the tracking system 100 may be installed in space 102 (e.g. store 122) so that shoppers need not engage in a conventional checkout process.
  • the tracking system 100 includes a tracking server 106, a set of sensors/cameras 108, and kiosks 3904, 3916.
  • the tracking server 106 is communicatively coupled with the set of cameras 108 and kiosks 3904, 3916 via network 107.
  • the set of cameras 108 and network 107 are described in detail in FIG. 1.
  • the set of cameras 108 is generally configured to capture videos from spaces in their corresponding field-of-views. For example, one set of cameras 108 is positioned to observe the environment inside the store 122 (i.e., inside the turnstile gates 114) and another set of cameras 108 is positioned to observe the environment outside the turnstile gates 114.
  • the network 107 is generally used to transfer data between the tracking server 106, the set of cameras 108, and the kiosks 3904, 3916.
  • Kiosks 3904 and 3918 are generally used to enable shoppers to credit their shopping sessions, i.e., to conduct a transaction and pay for one or more items 120 they selected in the store 122.
  • FIGS. 39 and 40 illustrate kiosks 3904 and 3916, it should be understood that the tracking system 100 can use alternative embodiments to kiosks 3904 and 3916 as described further below.
  • First kiosk 3904 is positioned outside the turnstile gates 114.
  • the first kiosk 3904 generally comprises a computing device that is configured to process data and interact with shoppers (e.g., person 3908) via user interfaces.
  • the computing device may be implemented in the first kiosk 3904, a hand-held device, a special-purpose device, a tablet, a mobile phone, a laptop, a desktop computer, etc.
  • the first kiosk 3904 is generally configured to receive a payment amount 3924 and provide a ticket 4012 (e.g., physical or electrical) to a person 3908, such as the person who provided payment amount 3924.
  • the ticket 4012 may correspond to one or more of the payment amount 3924 and a unique code 4008. Details of generating the ticket 4012 and the unique code 4008 are described in FIG. 40.
  • the first kiosk 3904 may include a screen 3910, a deposit slot 3912, a dispenser 3914, and a scanner 3926.
  • the first kiosk 3904 may be configured as shown or in any other suitable configuration.
  • the person 3908 may credit their shopping session by depositing an amount of cash into the first kiosk 3904, e.g., by depositing the amount of cash in the deposit slot 3912.
  • the first kiosk 3904 may count the deposited amount of cash and display the counted amount of cash on the screen 3910.
  • the person 3908 may then confirm the amount, e.g., from the touch screen 3910, a keypad, etc., and receive their ticket 4012.
  • one or more functionalities of the first kiosk 3904 may be implemented in a hand-held device, a special-purpose device, a tablet, a mobile phone, a laptop, a desktop computer, etc.
  • the person 3908 may credit their shopping session by providing an electronic payment as the payment amount 3924.
  • the first kiosk 3904 may include a module that establishes a connection with the electronic device of the person 3908 (e.g., using a Near-Field-Communication (NFC) method or any other suitable communication method) when the person 3908 initiates the connection from their electronic device.
  • the person 3908 can determine an amount of the electronic payment 3924, such as from a digital wallet and transfer that amount to the first kiosk 3904.
  • the person 3908 may provide the electronic payment amount 3924 using a digital wallet from an electronic device (e.g., mobile phone).
  • the person 3908 may credit their shopping session by providing any other method of payment, such as a credit card or a debit card, by presenting a method of payment to a card reader module of the first kiosk 3904.
  • the first kiosk 3904 may dispense a physical ticket 4012 from the dispenser 3914.
  • the first kiosk 3904 may communicate an electrical ticket 4012 to an electronic device of the person 3908 to be stored in a digital wallet(e.g., a digital wallet associated with a mobile phone of the person 3908).
  • the first kiosk 3904 may communicate an electrical ticket 4012 to an electronic device of the person 3908 by communicating the electrical ticket 4012 in a text message, a barcode to be scanned, or an image message to a phone number and/or an email address of the person 3908.
  • the scanner 3926 is generally configured to scan a ticket 4012 (electrical or physical). For example, in cases when there is change remaining from the shopping session (after a transaction for the shopping session is concluded), the person 3908 can scan their ticket 4012 using the scanner 3926 to be identified and authenticated, and receive the change.
  • the scanner 3926 include, but are not limited to, a Quick Response (QR) code scanner, a barcode scanner, an NFC scanner, or any other suitable type of scanner that can receive an electronic code.
  • QR Quick Response
  • This disclosure contemplates any number of kiosks 3904. The processes of calculating the change and returning it to the person 3908 are described in the corresponding description of FIG. 40.
  • a computing device that is not limited to any particular physical structure or dimension can be used.
  • the computing device may provide virtual interfaces.
  • the computing device may be configured to implement virtual reality technologies to interact with the person 3908.
  • the person 3908 may provide the payment amount 3924 to the computing device, receive the ticket 4012, among other functions to conduct their shopping session as described above.
  • the computing device may project or display a virtual first kiosk 3904 that is programmed to receive a payment amount 3924 and provide a ticket 4012 in exchange.
  • the computing device may comprise a virtual reality device, such as a virtual reality headset, eyeglasses, and the like.
  • a virtual reality device such as a virtual reality headset, eyeglasses, and the like.
  • the person 3908 puts on the virtual reality device, the person 3908 is able to interact with the virtual kiosk 3904, for example, provide the payment amount 3924, receive the ticket 4012, among other functions described herein.
  • the computing device may comprise a virtual reality dome or platform.
  • the virtual reality dome may include a dome in which a screen (flat or curved) displays the virtual kiosk 3904 in a virtual environment.
  • the person 3908 may enter or step into the dome and interact with the virtual kiosk 3904 to provide the payment amount 3924, receive the ticket 4012, among other functions described herein.
  • the computing device may comprise an augmented reality device, such as an augmented reality headset, eyeglasses, and the like.
  • an augmented reality device such as an augmented reality headset, eyeglasses, and the like.
  • the person 3908 puts on the augmented reality device, they can observe or see the virtual kiosk 3904.
  • the person 3908 can see the physical environment around them, such as the floor, their hands, etc.
  • the computing device may comprise an augmented reality dome or platform
  • the augmented reality dome may include a dome in which a screen (flat or curved) displays the virtual kiosk 3904 among physical objects surrounding the person 3908.
  • a screen flat or curved
  • the person 3908 can observe the virtual kiosk 3904 on the screen.
  • the person 3908 can see the physical environment around them, such as the floor, their hands, etc.
  • the computing device may provide a virtual interface.
  • the computing device may comprise a hyper-vision device that is configured to project a virtual interface in a four-dimensional display in a physical space to interact with the person 3908.
  • the computing device may project a virtual interface in a holographic display in a physical space to interact with the person 3908.
  • the computing device may comprise a special- purpose device that is configured to receive the payment amount 3924, provide the ticket 4012 in exchange, and other functions of the kiosk 3904 described herein.
  • the special-purpose device may be a hand-held device.
  • the special-purpose device may use digital interfaces to interact with the person 3908.
  • the person 3908 may interact with the special-purpose device by using a touchscreen, voice commands, a biometric scanner, gestures (e.g., hand gestures), among others.
  • the biometric scanner may comprise a fingerprint scanner, retinal scanner, facial feature scanner, among other types of scanners. As such, the person 3908 can use the biometric scanner to identify themselves.
  • the person 3908 can identify themselves using their voice.
  • the special device captures the voice of the person 3908 when they speak into a microphone associated with the device.
  • the special device communicates data comprising the voice of the person 3908 to the tracking server 106 for processing.
  • the tracking server 106 recognizes a unique voice signature of the person 3908 by extracting voice features of the person 3908.
  • the tracking server 106 compares the voice features of the person 3908 with stored voice features (associated with a plurality of shoppers) in a memory of the tracking server 106. If a match is found, the tracking server 106 identifies and authenticates the person 3908.
  • the person 3908 can identify themselves using their unique hand gesture signature.
  • the person 3908 can present their unique hand gesture signature to a camera associated with the device.
  • the device communicates data comprising the unique hand gesture signature of the person 3908 to the tracking server 106.
  • the tracking server 106 determines the unique signature or pattern in the hand gesture of the person 3908 by any image pattern recognition technique.
  • the tracking server 106 compares the gesture signature of the person 3908 with stored gesture signatures (associated with a plurality of shoppers) in a memory of the tracking server 106. If a match is found, the tracking server 106 identifies and authenticates the person 3908.
  • the person 3908 can identify themselves by logging into their account from the touchscreen. In one example, the person 3908 can identify themselves by logging into their account that is associated with the store 122. In another example, the person 3908 can identify themselves by logging into their account that is associated with a third-party organization.
  • the computing device may comprise an electronic device, such as a tablet, a mobile phone, a laptop, a desktop computer, and the like.
  • functionalities of the kiosk 3904 such as receiving the payment amount 3924 and providing the ticket 4012 to the person 3908 may be implemented in an electronic device that can provide such functionalities and interact with the shopper.
  • the second kiosk 3916 is positioned inside the turnstile gates 114.
  • the second kiosk 3916 generally comprises a computing device that is configured to process data and interact with shoppers (e.g., person 3908) via user interfaces.
  • the computing device may be implemented in the second kiosk 3916, a hand-held device, such as a special-purpose device, a tablet, etc.
  • the second kiosk 3916 is generally configured to receive an additional payment amount 3924 from the person 3908 and communicate to the tracking server 106 that the additional payment amount 3924 is received.
  • the second kiosk 3916 may include a screen 3918, a deposit slot 3920, a dispenser 3922, and a scanner 3928.
  • the second kiosk 3916 may be configured as shown or in any other suitable configuration.
  • one or more functionalities of the second kiosk 3916 may be implemented in a hand-held device, such as a special-purpose device, a tablet, etc.
  • a total cash value of those items 120 may be more than the initial payment amount 3924 they provided at the first kiosk 3904.
  • the second kiosk 3916 may be positioned inside the turnstile gates 114. so that the person 3908 can provide an additional payment amount 3924 to be able to purchase all the items 120 they initially selected. Otherwise, the person 3908 is asked to return one or more items 120 until the total cash value of the selected items 120 is less than or equal to the initial payment amount 3924.
  • the person 3908 can provide the additional payment amount 3924 at the second kiosk 3916 using the components of the second kiosk 3916, similar to that described above with respect to the first kiosk 3904. This disclosure contemplates any number of kiosks 3916.
  • the second kiosk 3916 Although the specification is described with respect to the second kiosk 3916, one of ordinary skill in the art would appreciate that one or more functions of the second kiosk 3916 described herein can be implemented in alternative embodiments.
  • the alternative embodiments to the second kiosk 3916 may be similar to the alternative embodiments to the first kiosk 3904 described above.
  • the store 122 includes racks 112 where items 120 are positioned.
  • the store 122 also includes turnstile gates 114 that control the entering and exiting traffic flow of the store 122.
  • the racks 112 and turnstile gates 114 are described in detail in FIG. 1.
  • the turnstile gates 114 may include scanners 115 that are configured to receive a scan of a ticket 4012.
  • the tracking server 106 identifies a person 3908 and allows the person 3908 to pass the turnstile gate 114. In this process, the tracking server 106 receives a scan of the ticket 4012 from the turnstile gate 114 (when the person 3908 scans the ticket 4012 by the scanner 115).
  • the tracking server 106 determines whether a code associated with the ticket 4012 matches a code previously generated for the person 3908 when they provided the payment amount 3924 at the first kiosk 3904. If the tracking server 106 determines that the code associated with the ticket 4012 matches the code previously generated for the person 3809, it authenticates the ticket 4012. As such, upon authenticating the ticket 4012, the tracking server 106 identifies the person 3908. In response to identifying the person 3908, tracking server 106 allows the person 3908 to pass the turnstile gate 114.
  • Entering and exiting traffic flow of the store 122 may be controlled by one or more devices (e.g. sensors/cameras 108 and/or scanners 115) that identify a person 3908 as they pass a turnstile gate 114.
  • a camera 108 may capture one or more images of a person 3908 as they approach a turnstile gate 114.
  • the tracking server 106 processes the one or more images of the person 3908, extracts features 4006 of the person 3908, and identifies the person 3908 based on features 4006 during a shopping session of the person 3908. This process is explained in detail in the corresponding descriptions of FIGS. 29-37 and 40-42.
  • a person 3908 may identify themselves using a scanner 115.
  • scanners 115 include, but are not limited to, a QR code scanner, a barcode scanner, an NFC scanner, or any other suitable type of scanner that can receive an electronic code embedded with information that uniquely identifies a person 3908.
  • a person 3908 may scan an electrical ticket 4012 on an electronic device (e.g. a mobile phone) on a scanner 115 to pass a turnstile gate 114.
  • the electronic device may provide the scanner 115 with an electronic code that uniquely identifies the person 3908.
  • the person 3908 is allowed to pass the turnstile gate 114.
  • a person 3908 may scan a physical ticket 4012 with a code on a scanner 115 to pass a turnstile gate 114, where the code uniquely identifies the person 3908.
  • a person 3908 may have a registered account with the store 122 to receive an identification code associated with the electrical ticket 4012 at their electronic device.
  • a person 3908 may use a third-party account associated with a third party organization to receive an identification code associated with the electrical ticket 4012 at their electronic device.
  • the store 122 may include any number of racks 112 and any number of turnstile gates 114.
  • turnstile gates 115 Although the specification is described with respect to the turnstile gates 115, one of ordinary skill in the art would appreciate alternative embodiments to the turnstile gates 115 as described below.
  • the tracking system 100 may allow the person 3908 to enter the store 122 on an “honor system.”
  • the tracking system 100 may use a screen notification system instead of or in addition to the turnstile gates 115.
  • the screen notification system may be positioned at the entrance of the store 112, and the person 3908 can identify themselves on the screen notification system.
  • the tracking system 100 may be configured to implement an electronic, digital, or virtual curtain at the entrance of the store 122 to identify (and authenticate) the person 3908.
  • the tracking system 100 receives sensor data indicating that the shopper is approaching the virtual curtain.
  • one or more cameras 108 capture one or more images from the person 3908 approaching the virtual curtain, and communicate those to the tracking system 100.
  • the tracking system 100 processes the one or more images and determines the identity of the person 3908, whether or not the person 3908 has provided the payment amount 3924, the amount of the provided payment amount 3924, the ticket 4012 associated with the person 3908 (physical, electrical, or virtual), and any other information that the tracking system 100 would use to facilitate the operation of the cashierless store 122 and the shopping session of the person 3908.
  • the tracking server 100 may use Radar technologies to implement a virtual curtain at the entrance of the store 122.
  • the tracking system 100 may further comprise one or more Radar sensors installed at or near the entrance of the store 122 within detection zones of these sensors. These Radar sensors may continuously or periodically emit radio waves with a certain frequency.
  • the person 3908 When the person 3908 comes within detection zones of these Radar sensors, they can detect the presence of the person 3908 based on radio waves that are reflected or bounced off the person 3908. These reflected radio waves may have different frequency and/or phase shifts from the emitted radio waves. The time delay between the emitted radio waves and the reflected radio waves corresponds to the distance between the person 3908 and the Radar sensors. The frequency shift, phase shift, and intensity of the reflected radio waves may be indicative of a surface type at the point of reflection, such as a fabric, skin, plastic, etc.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine features 4006 of the person 3908 including a unique signature based on clothes of the person 3908 (e.g., material, color, shape, etc.), a unique signature based on accessories of the person 3908 (e.g., an umbrella, eyeglasses, etc.), biometric features of the person 3908 (e.g., facial features, pose estimation, etc.), among others.
  • a unique signature based on clothes of the person 3908 e.g., material, color, shape, etc.
  • accessories of the person 3908 e.g., an umbrella, eyeglasses, etc.
  • biometric features of the person 3908 e.g., facial features, pose estimation, etc.
  • the tracking system 100 may use LiDAR technologies to implement a virtual curtain.
  • the tracking system 100 may further comprise one or more LiDAR, sensors installed at or near the entrance of the store 122 within detection zones of these sensors. These LiDAR sensors may continuously or periodically emit light having a certain wavelength. Similar to the embodiment above where the tracking system 100 uses Radar technologies, the tracking system 100 can detect that the person 3908 is approaching the virtual curtain by processing emitted and reflected light beams.
  • the tracking system 100 may use infrared technologies to implement a virtual curtain.
  • the tracking system 100 may further comprise one or more infrared sensors installed at or near the entrance of the store 122 within detection zones of these sensors. Similar to the embodiments described above where the tracking system 100 uses Radar technologies, the tracking system 100 can detect that the person 3908 is approaching the virtual curtain by processing sensor infrared sensor data captured by the infrared sensors.
  • the tracking system 100 may be configured to implement a virtual curtain at the entrance of the store 122 that is implemented by optical or light beams.
  • the light beams may comprise an invisible light, such as an infrared light.
  • the light beams may comprise a visible light, such as a photoelectric light.
  • the tracking system 100 may further comprise a set of light beam emitters and a set of light beam receivers positioned at the entrance of the store 122.
  • the set of light beam emitters may be positioned on the ceiling at the entrance of the store 122, and the set of light bean receivers may be positioned on the floor at the entrance of the store 122.
  • the light beam emitters may be positioned on the floor at the entrance of the store 122, and the light beam receivers may be positioned on the ceiling at the entrance of the store 122. In another example, the light beam emitters and receivers may be positioned on the side walls at the entrance of the store 122.
  • Each of the light beam emitters may continuously or periodically (e.g., every millisecond, every few hundred milliseconds, every second, or any other appropriate interval) emit light to its corresponding light beam receiver.
  • the person 3908 passes the virtual curtain, it causes that the light emission from one or more particular light beam emitters do not reach to their corresponding light beam receivers.
  • the person 3908 passing the virtual curtain further causes the light emission from the one or more particular light beam emitters to be reflected back to them.
  • These reflected light emissions may have different frequency shifts from the emitted light.
  • the time delay between the emitted light and the reflected light bounced off the person 3908 corresponds to the distance where the person 3908 caused the light emitted to be reflected.
  • the intensity of the reflected light may be indicative of a surface type at the point of reflection, such as a fabric, skin, plastic, etc.
  • those light beam receivers that did not receive light emissions may send a signal to the tracking server indicating that there is a breach in the virtual curtain.
  • the tracking system 100 may determine features 4006 of the person 3908 including a unique signature based on clothes of the person 3908 (e.g., material, color, shape, etc.), a unique signature based on accessories of the person 3908 (e.g., an umbrella, eyeglasses, etc.), biometric features of the person 3908 (e.g., facial features, pose estimation, etc.), among others.
  • the tracking system 100 may identify the person 3908 using their features 4006, and use those features 4006 to track the person 3908 during their shopping session at the store 122.
  • the tracking system 100 may use any combination of image, LiDAR, Radar, infrared, and light beam data processing technologies to implement a virtual curtain at the entrance of the store 122.
  • the tracking system 100 is configured to provide a ticket 4012 (physical or electrical) to a person 3908 when the person 3908 provides a payment amount 3924 at the first kiosk 3904.
  • the person 3908 may provide the payment amount 3924 by providing an amount of cash and/or electronic payment (e.g., via a digital wallet) to credit their shopping session as described above.
  • the person 3908 can use the ticket 4012 to pass the turnstile gates 114, e.g., by scanning their ticket 4012 by a scanner 115 at a turnstile gate 114.
  • the tracking system 100 extracts features 4006 of the person 3908 to track shopping activities of the person 3908 in the store 122, for example, when the person 3908 selects one or more items 120 from the racks 112.
  • the tracking system 100 extracts features 4006 of the person 3908 by processing an image feed received from a set of cameras 108 observing the environment inside the store 122. The processes of extracting and processing the features 4006 of the person 3908 are described in detail in the corresponding descriptions of FIGS. 29-37.
  • the tracking system 100 conducts a transaction when the person 3908 presents the ticket 4012, e.g., by scanning the ticket 4012 at a check-out counter/location. These configurations are described in detail in the corresponding descriptions of FIGS. 40 and 41.
  • the tracking system 100 is configured to use features 4006 of the person 3908 as a virtual ticket 4012 (instead of physical or electrical ticket 4012) during the shopping session of the person 3908.
  • the tracking server 106 may extract the features 4006 of the person 3908, similar to that described in FIGS. 29-37.
  • the tracking system 100 extracts features 4006 of the person 3908 when the person 3908 provides a payment amount 3924 at the first kiosk 3904.
  • the tracking system 100 uses the extracted features 4006 of the person 3908 to identify and authenticate the person 3908 before allowing the person 3908 to pass the turnstile gates 114.
  • the tracking system 100 authenticates the person 3908, it allows the person to pass the turnstile gates 114.
  • the tracking system 100 then tracks the shopping activities of the person 3908 using their features 4006.
  • the tracking system 100 conducts a transaction for the shopping session of the person 3908 using their features 4006.
  • the tracking system 100 is configured to use any combination of a ticket 4012 and features 4006 of the person 3908 to identify the person 3908 and conduct a transaction of the shopping session of the person 3908.
  • the payment amount 3924 may comprise cryptocurrencies.
  • the cryptocurrencies may comprise Bitcoin (BTC), Bitcoin Cash (BCH), Litecoin (LTC), Ethereum (ETH), Binance Coin (BNB), and other forms of cryptocurrencies.
  • the tracking system 100 may be configured to accept cryptocurrencies as a form of the payment amount 3924 by implementing blockchain technologies.
  • the payment amount 3924 may comprise digital currencies.
  • the payment amount 3924 may be provided using a “cash card” that is a form of digital currencies that can be equivalent to cash.
  • the cash card may be configured to be used physically in order to provide the payment amount 3924.
  • the cash card may be swiped, scanned, or any other action may be performed that would cause the payment amount 3924 to be transferred to the tracking system 100.
  • the cash card may not be linked or associated with a financial institution.
  • the cash card may be linked or associated with a shopping profile or shopping account of the person 3908 at the store 122.
  • the cash card may be linked or associated with a third-party organization account of the person 3908.
  • the cash card may be a closed-loop card, which means that the cash card may be used in a limited geographical range area, such as a particular city or providence.
  • the cash card may be configured to be accepted in one or more certain stores, such as the cashierless store.
  • the cash card may be an open-loop card, which means that the cash card may be accepted anywhere, for example, in different stores, different establishments, online, etc.
  • the payment amount 3924 may comprise one or more digital currencies and/or cryptocurrencies that are loaded in a “cash card.”
  • the cash card may be physically used to provide or transfer one or more digital currencies and/or cryptocurrencies equivalent to cash to the tracking system 100.
  • FIG. 40 illustrates an example operational flow of the operations of the tracking system 100.
  • a first set of cameras 108 is observing the environment surrounding the first kiosk 3904
  • a second set of cameras 108 is observing the environment surrounding the turnstile gates 114
  • a third set of cameras 108 is observing the environment surrounding a checkout counter/location 4022
  • a fourth set of cameras 108 is observing the environment surrounding the second kiosk 3916.
  • a set of cameras 108 is also observing the environment inside the store 122.
  • the cameras 108, kiosks 3904, 3916, turnstile gates 114, and checkout location/counter 4022 are communicatively coupled with the tracking server 106.
  • an operational flow of conducting a transaction at a cashierless store 122 using a ticket 4012 begins when a person 3908 provides a payment amount 3924 to the first kiosk 3904.
  • the person 3908 credits their shopping session by providing a payment amount 3924.
  • the payment amount 3924 may include an amount of cash deposited into the first kiosk 3904, as described in FIG. 39.
  • the payment amount 3924 may include an electronic payment that is associated with a digital wallet of the person 3908, as described in FIG. 39.
  • the digital wallet may be associated with an account of the person 3908 that is related to the cashierless store 122 or a third-party organization.
  • the first kiosk 3904 may send a message to the tracking server 106 indicating that the payment amount 3924 is received.
  • the tracking server 106 generates a session identifier 4002 for the person 3908.
  • the session identifier 4002 may represent a shopping profile of the person 3908 to track and associate shopping activities of the person 3908 to the session identifier 4002, such as the payment amount 3924, a digital cart 4030, extracted features 4006 of the person 3908, change 4026 remaining from a shopping transaction, among others.
  • the tracking server 106 associates the payment amount 3924 to the session identifier 4002.
  • the tracking server 106 also associates a unique code 4008 to the session identifier 4002.
  • the unique code 4008 may represent or include at least one of a scannable code (e.g., a QR code, a barcode, etc.) and a representation of extracted features 4006 of the person 3908.
  • the unique code 4008 may be used to identify the person 3908 during their shopping session.
  • the unique code 4008 may be generated using a hash function or an encryption function performed on at least one of the payment amount 3924 and extracted features 4006.
  • the tracking server 106 sends a message 4010 to the first kiosk 3904 to provide a ticket 4012 corresponding to the payment amount 3924 and the unique code 4008.
  • the tracking server 106 extracts features 4006 of the person 3908 at the first kiosk 3904.
  • the tracking server 106 extracts features 4006 of the person 3908 from a first image feed 4004 received from the first set of cameras 108.
  • the first image feed 4004 may include frames of videos captured by the first set of cameras 108.
  • the tracking server 106 may use any image/video processing module, such as image/video neural network-based processing modules and the like, similar to that described in FIGS. 29-37.
  • the tracking server 106 may extract any biometric feature 4006 of the person 3908 including but not limited to facial features, retinal features, and pose estimations associated with the person 3908.
  • the ticket 4012 with the unique code 4008 may represent one or both of the payment amount 3924 and extracted features 4006 of the person 3908.
  • the tracking server 106 may not extract features 4006 of the person 3908 at the first kiosk 3904 (and extract features 4006 of the person 3908 at a turnstile gate 114 for the first time which is described further below).
  • the ticket 4012 with the unique code 4008 may represent the payment amount 3924.
  • the person 3908 can receive the ticket 4012 (electrical or physical), similar to that described in FIG. 39.
  • the person 3908 may then approach a turnstile gate 114 at an entrance of store 122.
  • the tracking server 106 can identify the person 3908 by one or more methods including: 1) receiving a scan of the ticket 4012 when the person 3908 scans the ticket 4012 by a scanner 115 at the turnstile gate 114 and 2) using the features 4006 of the person 3908.
  • the tracking server 106 may extract features 4006 of the person 3908 for the first time at the turnstile gate 114.
  • the tracking server 106 may receive a second image feed 4014 from the second set of cameras 108.
  • the tracking server 106 may extract features 4006 of the person 3908 from the second image feed 4014, similar to that described in FIGS. 29-37.
  • the tracking server 106 may then associate the features 4006 of the person 3908 extracted at the turnstile gate 114 to the session identifier 4002.
  • features 4006 of the person 3908 may be extracted at the first kiosk 3904 and the turnstile gate 114.
  • the tracking server 106 may identify the person 3908 by comparing features 4006 of the person 3908 that are extracted at the first kiosk 3904 with features 4006 of the person 3908 that are extracted at the turnstile gate 114.
  • the tracking server 106 authenticates the identity of the person 3908 if the features 4006 of the person 3908 that are extracted at the first kiosk 3904 match the features 4006 of the person 3908 that are extracted at the turnstile gate 114.
  • the tracking server 106 may then associate the features 4006 of the person 3908 extracted at the turnstile gate 114 to the session identifier 4002.
  • the tracking server 106 identifies the person 3908 at the turnstile gate 114, it sends instructions 4016 to the turnstile gate 114 to open, thus, allowing the person 3908 to pass the turnstile gate 114.
  • the tracking server 106 tracks shopping activities of the person 3908, such as the person 3908 selecting items 120.
  • the tracking server 106 tracks the shopping activities of the person 3908 by processing an image feed received from a set of cameras 108 observing the environment inside the store 122, which is described in detail in the corresponding descriptions of FIGS. IS IS.
  • the tracking server 106 identifies the person 3908 at the checkout location 4022 by one or more methods including: 1) receiving a scan of the ticket 4012 when the person 3908 scans the ticket 4012 by a scanner at the checkout location 4022 and 2) using the features 4006 of the person 3908.
  • the tracking server 106 may receive a third image feed 4018 from the third set of cameras 108, and identify the person 3908 based on their features 4006, similar to that described above when the person 3908 was at the turnstile gate 114 and during their shopping session. In other words, the tracking server 106 detects that the person 3908 is checking out the plurality of items 120 at the checkout location 4022.
  • the tracking server 106 receives a digital cart 4030 associated with the person 3908.
  • the digital cart 4030 includes a plurality of items 120 that the person 3908 has selected during their shopping session and a total cash value 4020 of the plurality of items 120.
  • the process of generating the digital cart 4030 for the person 3908 is explained in detail in the corresponding descriptions of FIGS. 10-18.
  • the tracking server 106 determines which items 120 the person 3908 picks up from racks 112 based on sensor data received from cameras 108 and weight sensors 110 positioned in the racks 112 (see FIG. 1).
  • the tracking server 106 adds the selected items 120 to the digital cart 4030 of the person 3908.
  • the tracking server 106 determines whether the total cash value 4020 of the plurality of items 120 is less than or equal to the payment amount 3924. If it is determined that the total cash value 4020 is more than the payment amount 3924, the tracking server 106 requests the person 3908 to return one or more items 120 from the plurality of items 120 until the total cash value 4020 is less than or equal to the payment amount 3924. For example, the tracking server 106 may request the person 3908 to remove one or more items 120 from the plurality of items 120 by displaying the request on a screen at the checkout location 4022.
  • the tracking server 106 may compare the new total cash value 4020 with the payment amount 3924 to determine whether the new total cash value 4020 has become less than or equal to the payment amount 3924.
  • the tracking server 106 may repeat requesting the person 3908 to remove one or more items 120 from the plurality of items 120 until the total cash value 4020 is less than or equal to the payment amount 3924. If it is determined that the total cash value 4020 of the plurality of items 120 is less than or equal to the payment amount 3924, the tracking server 106 concludes a transaction by deducting the total cash value 4020 from the plurality of items 120.
  • the tracking server 106 is also configured to determine whether there is change 4026 remaining from the transaction.
  • the tracking server 106 calculates the change 4026 corresponding to the difference between the total cash value 4020 and the payment amount 3924. If the tracking server 106 determines that there is no change 4026 remaining from the transaction, the tracking server 106 adds metadata to the ticket 4012 (e.g., to the unique code 4008 or payment amount 3924) indicating that there is no change remained for this ticket 4012.
  • the person 3908 can exit the store 122 with the plurality of items 120, e.g., by scanning their ticket 4012 at an exiting turnstile gate 114.
  • the tracking server 106 adds metadata to the session identifier 4002 indicating that there is no change remained for this session identifier 4002.
  • the tracking server 106 identifies the person 3908 based on their features 4006.
  • the tracking server 106 sends instructions to the exiting turnstile gate 114 to open so that the person 3908 can exit the store 122.
  • the tracking server 106 may send the instructions to the turnstile gate 114 to open so that the person 3908 can exit the store 122 only when the ticket 4012 and/or the session identifier 4002 are/is associated with metadata indicating that the total cash value 4020 in the digital cart 4030 is less than or equal to the payment amount 3924.
  • the tracking server 106 determines that there is change 4026 remaining from the transaction, the tracking server 106 facilitates to return the change 4026 to the person 3908 as described below.
  • the tracking server 106 may associate the change 4026 to the ticket 4012. In an embodiment where features 4006 of the person 3908 are used instead of a physical or electrical ticket 4012, the tracking server 106 may associate the change 4026 to the session identifier 4002. In either case, the person 3908 can receive the change 4026 from the first kiosk 3904.
  • the person 3908 may scan their ticket 4012 at the first kiosk 3904, and the first kiosk 3904 dispenses or returns the change 4026 to the person 3908, e.g., based on instructions 4028 sent from the tracking server 106 indicating that this ticket 4012 is associated with the calculated change 4026.
  • the tracking server 106 identifies the person 3908 based on their features 4006, e.g., by processing an image feed received from the first set of cameras 108. Then, the first kiosk 3904 dispenses or returns the change 4026 to the person 3908.
  • the tracking server 106 returns or credits the change 4026 to the digital wallet of the person 3908 even without the person 3908 going to the first kiosk 3904. For example, once the tracking server 106 calculates the change 4026 during the check-out process, it returns or credits the change 4026 to the digital wallet of the person 3908.
  • the tracking server 106 may provide an option to the person 3908 to provide an additional payment amount 3924 in a case where the total cash value 4020 of the plurality of items 120 is more than the initial payment amount 3924.
  • the tracking server 106 may provide the option to provide an additional payment amount 3924 by displaying the option on a screen at the checkout location 4022.
  • the person 3908 may either choose to return one or more items 120 from the plurality of items 120 until the total cash value 4020 of the plurality of items 120 is less than or equal to the initial payment amount 3924 (which is described above) or to provide an additional payment amount 3924 so that the person 3908 would not need to return any item 120 from of the plurality of items 120.
  • the person 3908 can provide the additional payment amount 3924 at the second kiosk 3916.
  • the person 3908 can provide the additional payment amount 3924, such as an additional amount of cash and/or electronic payment, similar to that described above with respect to providing the initial payment amount 3924 at the first kiosk 3904.
  • the tracking server 106 can identify the person 3908 at the second kiosk 3916 by one or more methods including: 1) receiving a scan of the ticket 4012 when the person 3908 scans their ticket 4012 at the second kiosk 3916 and 2) using the features 4006 of the person 3908.
  • the tracking server 106 may receive a fourth image feed 4024 from the fourth set of cameras 108, and identify the person 3908 based on their features 4006, similar to that described above during their shopping session.
  • the tracking server 106 may associate the additional payment amount 3924 to the ticket 4012. Then, the person 3908 can return to the checkout location 4022, and the tracking server 106 can proceed to conclude the transaction with the updated ticket 4012.
  • the tracking server 106 may associate the additional payment amount 3924 to the session identifier 4002. Then, the person 3908 can return to the checkout location 4022, and the tracking server 106 can conclude a transaction for the updated session identifier 4002.
  • the tracking system 100 is configured to facilitate the operation of the cashierless store 122 without using the kiosk 3904.
  • the person 3908 is able to credit their shopping session without providing a payment amount 3924 to the kiosk 3904.
  • the tracking server 106 is associated with a software/web/mobile application that is configured to receive an electronic payment amount 3924 for a person 3908.
  • the software/web/mobile application may include user interfaces to interact with users and display their balance payment history of shopping sessions at the store 122.
  • the person 3908 can register an account on the software/web/mobile application. Upon registering on the software/web/mobile application, it will be linked to a shopping profile associated with that person 3908.
  • the software/web/mobile application may be associated with the store 122 or a third-party organization.
  • the person 3908 can transfer an electronic payment amount 3924 to the software/web/mobile application that is installed on their electronic device.
  • the person 3908 can transfer the electronic payment amount 3924 from the software/web/mobile application to their shopping profile at any time even before arriving at the store 122.
  • features 4006 of the person 3908 are already stored in the shopping profile associated with the person 3908, e.g., from their previous shopping session.
  • the person 3908 may specify whether to receive an electronic ticket 4012 or use features 4006 to conduct a transaction for their shopping session. In one embodiment, the person 3908 may specify an estimated arrival time at the store 122 on the software/web/mobile application.
  • the tracking server 106 When the person 3908 transfers the electronic payment amount 3924 to their shopping profile, the tracking server 106 is notified. In one embodiment, once the person 3908 transfers the electronic payment amount 3924 to their shopping profile, the tracking server 106 may generate and send an electronic ticket 4012 to their electronic device, e.g., by a text message, a barcode, a QR code, an image message, etc. on their phone number and/or email address. For example the electronic ticket 4012 may be associated with a unique code 4008 that corresponds to the transferred electronic payment amount 3924.
  • the tracking server 106 receives a scan of the ticket 4012 from the turnstile gate 114 and determines that the unique code 4008 associated with the ticket 4012 matches the unique code 4008 previously generated and sent to this person 3908. Thus, the tracking server 106 opens the turnstile gate 114 for the person 3908. The tracking server 106 uses the ticket 4012 to conduct a transaction of the shopping session of the person 3908, similar to that described above.
  • the tracking server 106 may use features 4006 of the person 3908 to identify and authenticate the person 3908 during their shopping session. For example, when the person 3908 transfers the electronic payment amount 3924 to their shopping profile (from the software/web/mobile application), the tracking server 106 adds metadata to the shopping profile of the person 3908 that indicates to expect the arrival of the person 3908 at the store 122 at an estimated time specified by the person 3908. As such, when the person 3908 arrives at the store 122, the tracking server 106 identifies the person 3908 based on their features 4006 which are already stored in the shopping profile of the person 3908. Upon identifying the person 3908, the tracking server 106 opens the turnstile gate 114 for the person 3908, similar to that described above. The tracking server 106 conducts a transaction of the shopping session of the person 3908 using their features 4006 as a virtual ticket 4021, similar to as described above.
  • the shopping profile of the person 3908 may be shared among a plurality of people, for example, members of a family.
  • one or more of features 4006, phone numbers, and email addresses associated with the plurality of people may be stored in the shopping session of the person 3908.
  • the person 3908 transfers the electronic payment amount 3924 from the software/web/mobile application to their shopping profile, they may specify to which member(s) from the plurality of people send the electronic ticket 4012 (e.g., to which phone number(s) and/or email address(es)).
  • the person 3908 transfers the electronic payment amount 3924 from the software/web/mobile application to their shopping profile, they may specify which member(s) from the plurality of people will carry out the shopping session at the store 122. As such, when those member(s) arrive at the store 122, the tracking server 106 identifies them based on their features 4006.
  • FIG. 41 illustrates an example flowchart for a method 4100 for operating the tracking system 100.
  • a physical or an electrical ticket 4012 may be presented to the person 3908 to identify and track the person 3908 during their shopping session.
  • Method 4100 begins at step 4102 where the tracking server 106 receives a payment amount 3924 from a person 3908 at the first kiosk 3904.
  • the person 3908 credits their shopping session by providing the payment amount 3924, similar to that described in FIG. 40.
  • the first kiosk 3904 may send a message to the tracking server 106 indicating that the payment amount 3924 is received.
  • the tracking server 106 may extract features 4006 of the person 3908 at the first kiosk 3904, similar to that described in FIG. 40.
  • the tracking server 106 generates a session identifier 4002, where the session identifier 4002 is associated with the payment amount 3924 and a unique code 4008.
  • the unique code 4008 may represent or include at least one of a scannable code and a representation of the extracted features 4006, similar to that described in FIG. 40.
  • the tracking server 106 sends a message 4010 to the first kiosk 3904 to provide a ticket 4012 corresponding to the payment amount 3924 and the unique code 4008 to the person 3908.
  • the ticket 4012 may be a physical ticket 4012.
  • the first kiosk 3904 may dispense the physical ticket 4012 to the person 3908.
  • the ticket 4012 may be an electronic ticket 4012. This is the case where the person 3908 has used a digital wallet to credit their shopping session in step 4102. In this case, the first kiosk 3904 communicates the electronic ticket 4012 to the electronic device of the person 3908.
  • the first kiosk 3904 may communicate the electronic ticket 4012 to the electronic device of the person 3908 by sending a text message and/or an image message displaying a scannable code, e.g., a QR code, a barcode, etc.
  • a scannable code e.g., a QR code, a barcode, etc.
  • the first kiosk 3904 may send an image of the unique code 4008 to a phone number and/or an email address associated with the electronic device of the person 3908.
  • the tracking server 106 receives a digital cart 4030 associated with the person 3908, where the digital cart 4030 includes a plurality of items 120 and a total cash value 4020 of the plurality of items 120.
  • the tracking server 106 tracks the person 3908 using their extracted features 4006 to determine items 120 that the person 3908 selects and associates a digital cart 4030 that includes those items 120 to the person 3908 (and by extension to the session identifier 4002).
  • step 4106 may include identifying the person 3908 at the checkout location 4022 by one or more methods including: 1) receiving a scan of the ticket 4012 at the checkout location 4022 and 2) using features 4006 of the person 3908, similar to that described in FIG. 40.
  • the person 3908 can use the ticket 4012 (physical or electrical) to pay for the plurality of items 120, for example, by scanning the ticket 4012 by a scanner at the check-out location 4022.
  • the tracking server 106 may identify person 3908 at a checkout location 4022 based on their extracted features 4006.
  • the tracking server 106 determines whether the total cash value 4020 of the plurality of items 120 is less than or equal to the payment amount 3924. If it is determined that the total cash value 4020 of the plurality of items 120 is more than to the payment amount 3924, the method 4100 proceeds to step 4112. If, however, it is determined that the total cash value 4020 of the plurality of items 120 is less than or equal to the payment amount 3924, the method 4100 proceeds to step 4114.
  • the tracking server 106 requests the person 3908 to remove one or more items 120 from the plurality of items 120 until the total cash value 4020 of the plurality of items 120 is less than or equal to the payment amount 3924.
  • the tracking server 106 may request the person 3908 to remove one or more items 120 from the plurality of items 120 by displaying the request on a screen at the checkout location 4022.
  • step 4112 the method 4100 returns to step 4110 where the tracking server 106 determines whether the total cash value 4020 of the plurality of items 120 has become less than or equal to the payment amount 3924 associated with the ticket 4012. Method 4100 executes step 4112 and returns to step 4110 until the condition in step 4110 is satisfied.
  • the tracking server 106 concludes a transaction by deducting the total cash value 4020 from the payment amount 3924.
  • the tracking server 106 concludes the transaction by deducting the total cash value 4020 from the payment amount 3924 associated with the physical ticket 4012.
  • the tracking server 106 may deduct the total cash value 4020 from the electronic payment amount 3924. The processes of determining whether there is change 4026 remaining from the transaction, returning the change 4026 to the person 3908 if there is any, and receiving an additional payment amount 3924 from the person 3908 are described in the corresponding description of FIG. 40.
  • the features 4006 of the person 3908 are extracted at the first kiosk 3904 or the turnstile gate 114.
  • the tracking server 106 may associate the extracted features 4006 of the person 3908 in addition to the payment amount 3924 to the session identifier 4002.
  • the ticket 4012 with the unique code 4008 may represent or correspond to one or both of the payment amount 3924 and extracted features 4006 of the person 3908.
  • the tracking server 106 may identify the person 3908 based at least in part upon one or both of the previously extracted features 4006 and the unique code 4008.
  • the tracking server 106 associates the payment amount 3924 to the session identifier 4002 (when the person 3908 is at the first kiosk 3904).
  • the ticket 4012 with the unique code 4008 may represent or correspond to the payment amount 3924.
  • the tracking server 106 extracts features 4006 of the person 3908 and associates those features 4006 to the session identifier 4002.
  • the features 4006 of the person 3908 may be extracted at both the first kiosk 3904 and the turnstile gate 114.
  • a ticket 4012 is provided to the person 3908 for additional confirmation for identifying (and authenticating the identity of) the person 3908. For example, on crowded days when there are a lot of shoppers entering and exiting the store 122, in addition to tracking the person 3908 using their extracted features 4006, a ticket 4012 may be provided to the person 3908 for additional confirmation and accuracy for identifying the person 3908.
  • Method 4100 may include more, fewer, or other steps. For example, steps may be performed in parallel or any suitable order. While at times discussed as tracking system 100, tracking server 106, cameras 108, kiosks 3904, 3916, or components of any of thereof performing steps, any suitable system or components of the system may perform one or more steps of the method 4100.
  • FIG. 42 illustrates an example flowchart for a method 4200 for operating the tracking system 100.
  • no physical or electrical ticket 4012 is involved. Instead, features 4006 of the person 3908 are used to identify and track the person 3908 during their shopping session in a cashierless store 122.
  • the tracking server 106 uses features 4006 of the person 3908 for: 1) identifying that the person 3908 has provided a payment amount 3924 at the first kiosk 3904, 2) identifying the person 3908 at a turnstile gate 114 and allowing the person 3908 to pass a turnstile gate 114, 3) tracking shopping activities of the person 3908 in the store 122, 4) conducting a transaction at a check-out counter/location 4022, 5) returning any change 4026 to the person 3908, 6) identifying that the person 3908 has provided an additional payment amount 3924 at the second kiosk 3916 if person 3908 chose to do so, and 7) identifying the person 3908 exiting the store 122.
  • Method 4200 begins at step 4202 where the tracking server 106 receives a first image feed 4004 showing a person 3908 at the first kiosk 3904 from the first set of cameras 108, similar to that described in FIG. 40.
  • the tracking server 106 extracts features 4006 of the person 3908 from the first image feed 4004, similar to that described in FIG. 40.
  • the tracking server 106 may extract any biometric feature 4006 of the person 3908 including but not limited to facial features, and retinal features, and pose estimations associated with the person 3908.
  • the first kiosk 3904 receives a payment amount 3924 from the person 3908, similar to that described in step 4102 of FIG. 41.
  • the first kiosk 3904 may send a message to the tracking server 106 indicating that the payment amount 3924 is received.
  • the tracking server 106 generates a session identifier 4002, where the session identifier 4002 is associated with the payment amount 3924 and the extracted features 4006 of the person 3908.
  • the tracking server 106 uses the extracted features 4006 of the person 3908 to confirm (and authenticate) the identity of the person 3908 later, for example, at a turnstile gate 114, during the shopping session of the person 3908, among other stages.
  • the tracking server 106 identifies the person 3908 at a turnstile gate 114 at an entrance of the store 122 based on the extracted features 4006 of the person 3908.
  • the tracking server 106 may extract features 4006 of the person 3908 at the turnstile gate 114 to determine whether there is a session identifier 4002 (e.g., in a memory of the tracking server 106) that is already generated for the person 3908. For example, the tracking server 106 determines whether there is a session identifier 4002 that is already generated for the person 3908 by comparing a plurality of features 4006 associated with a plurality of shoppers (previously extracted and stored in the memory of the tracking server 106) with features 4006 of the person 3908. In response to determining that there is a session identifier 4002 that already exists for the person 3908, the tracking server 106 associates the features 4006 that are extracted at the turnstile gate 114 to that session identifier 4002.
  • a session identifier 4002 e.g., in a memory of the tracking server 106
  • the tracking server 106 determines whether there is a session identifier 4002 that is already generated for the person 3908 by comparing a plurality of features 4006
  • the tracking server 106 receives a digital cart 4030 associated with the person 3908, where the digital cart 4030 includes a plurality of items 120 and a total cash value 4020 of the plurality of items 120.
  • step 4212 may be similar to step 4108 of method 4100 described in FIG. 41.
  • step 4214 the tracking server 106 determines whether the total cash value 4020 of the plurality of items 120 is less than or equal to the payment amount 3924.
  • step 4214 may be similar to step 4110 of method 4100 described in FIG. 41.
  • the tracking server 106 requests the person 3908 to remove one or more items 120 from the plurality of items 120 until the total cash value 4020 of the plurality of items 120 is less than or equal to the payment amount 3924.
  • step 4216 may be similar to step 4112 of method 4100 described in FIG. 41.
  • Method 4200 executes step 4216 and returns to step 4214 until the condition in step 4214 is satisfied. The processes of determining whether there is change 4026 remaining from the transaction, returning the change 4026 to the person 3908 if there is any, and receiving an additional payment amount 3924 from the person 3908 are described in the corresponding description of FIG. 40.
  • step 4218 the tracking server 106 concludes a transaction by deducting the total cash value 4020 from the payment amount 3924.
  • step 4218 may be similar to step 4114 of method 4100 described in FIG. 41. Modifications, additions, or omissions may be made to method 4200 depicted in FIG. 42.
  • Method 4200 may include more, fewer, or other steps. For example, steps may be performed in parallel or any suitable order. While at times discussed as tracking system 100, tracking server 106, cameras 108, kiosks 3904, 3916, or components of any of thereof performing steps, any suitable system or components of the system may perform one or more steps of the method 4200.
  • FIG. 43 illustrates an embodiment of tracking system 100 configured to facilitate the operation of a cashierless store 122.
  • the tracking system 100 may include the tracking server 106 that is communicatively coupled with kiosks 3904, 3916 via network 107.
  • the tracking system 100 may be configured as shown or in any other suitable configuration.
  • the tracking server 106 comprises a processor 4302, a network interface 4304, and a memory 4306.
  • the tracking server 106 may be configured as shown or in any other suitable configuration.
  • Processor 4302 comprises one or more processors operably coupled to network interface 4304 and memory 4306.
  • the processor 4302 is any electronic circuitry including, but not limited to, state machines, one or more central processing unit (CPU) chips, logic units, cores (e.g. a multi-core processor), field-programmable gate array (FPGAs), application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs), or digital signal processors (DSPs).
  • the processor 4302 may be a programmable logic device, a microcontroller, a microprocessor, or any suitable combination of the preceding.
  • the one or more processors are configured to process data and may be implemented in hardware or software.
  • the processor 4302 may be 8-bit, 16-bit, 32-bit, 64-bit, or of any other suitable architecture.
  • the processor 4302 may include an arithmetic logic unit (ALU) for performing arithmetic and logic operations, processor registers that supply operands to the ALU and store the results of ALU operations, and a control unit that fetches instructions from memory and executes them by directing the coordinated operations of the ALU, registers and other components.
  • the one or more processors are configured to implement various instructions.
  • the one or more processors are configured to execute instructions or code (e.g., software instructions 4312) to implement a tracking engine 4308.
  • processor 4302 may be a special- purpose computer designed to implement the functions disclosed herein.
  • the processor 4302 is implemented using logic units, FPGAs, ASICs, DSPs, or any other suitable hardware.
  • the processor 4302 is configured to operate as described in FIGS. 39-42.
  • the processor 4302 may be configured to perform the steps of methods 4100 and 4200 as described in FIGS. 41 and 42, respectively.
  • Memory 4306 may be volatile or non-volatile and may comprise a read-only memory (ROM), random-access memory (RAM), ternary content-addressable memory (TCAM), dynamic random-access memory (DRAM), and static random-access memory (SRAM).
  • Memory 4306 may be implemented using one or more disks, tape drives, solid-state drives, and/or the like.
  • Memory 4306 is operable to store session identifier 4002, features 4006, message 4010, image feeds 4004, 4014, 4018, 4024, payment amount 3924, ticket 4012, unique code 4008, digital cart 4030, instructions 4016, 4028, change amount 4026, software instructions 4312, and/or any other data or instructions.
  • the software instructions 4312 may comprise any suitable set of instructions, logic, rules, or code operable to execute the processor 4302.
  • Network interface 4304 is configured to enable wired and/or wireless communications (e.g., via network 107).
  • the network interface 4304 is configured to communicate data between the tracking server 106 and other devices (e.g., kiosks 3904, 3916 and turnstile gates 114), servers, databases, systems, or domain(s).
  • the network interface 4304 may comprise a WIFI interface, a local area network (LAN) interface, a wide area network (WAN) interface, a modem, a switch, or a router.
  • the processor 4302 is configured to send and receive data using the network interface 4304.
  • the network interface 4304 may be configured to use any suitable type of communication protocol as would be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • the first kiosk 3904 comprises a processor 4320, a network interface 4322, and a memory 4324.
  • the first kiosk 3904 may be configured as shown or in any other suitable configuration.
  • Processor 4320 comprises one or more processors operably coupled to network interface 4322 and memory 4324.
  • the processor 4320 is any electronic circuitry including, but not limited to, state machines, one or more central processing unit (CPU) chips, logic units, cores (e.g. a multi-core processor), field-programmable gate array (FPGAs), application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs), or digital signal processors (DSPs).
  • the processor 4320 may be a programmable logic device, a microcontroller, a microprocessor, or any suitable combination of the preceding.
  • the one or more processors are configured to process data and may be implemented in hardware or software.
  • the processor 4320 may be 8-bit, 16-bit, 32-bit, 64-bit, or of any other suitable architecture.
  • the processor 4320 may include an arithmetic logic unit (ALU) for performing arithmetic and logic operations, processor registers that supply operands to the ALU and store the results of ALU operations, and a control unit that fetches instructions from memory and executes them by directing the coordinated operations of the ALU, registers and other components.
  • ALU arithmetic logic unit
  • the one or more processors are configured to implement various instructions.
  • the one or more processors are configured to execute instructions or code (e.g., software instructions 4326) to implement functions disclosed herein.
  • processor 4320 may be a special- purpose computer designed to implement the functions disclosed herein.
  • the processor 4320 is implemented using logic units, FPGAs, ASICs, DSPs, or any other suitable hardware.
  • the processor 4320 is configured to operate as described in FIGS. 39-42.
  • Network interface 4322 is configured to enable wired and/or wireless communications (e.g., via network 107).
  • the network interface 4322 is configured to communicate data between the first kiosk 3904 and other devices, servers (e.g., tracking server 106), databases, systems, or domain(s).
  • the network interface 4322 may comprise a WIFI interface, a local area network (LAN) interface, a wide area network (WAN) interface, a modem, a switch, or a router.
  • the processor 4320 is configured to send and receive data using the network interface 4322.
  • the network interface 4322 may be configured to use any suitable type of communication protocol as would be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • Memory 4324 may be volatile or non-volatile and may comprise a read-only memory (ROM), random-access memory (RAM), ternary content-addressable memory (TCAM), dynamic random-access memory (DRAM), and static random-access memory (SRAM). Memory 4324 may be implemented using one or more disks, tape drives, solid-state drives, and/or the like. Memory 4324 is operable to store software instructions 4326 and/or any other data or instructions. The software instructions 4326 may comprise any suitable set of instructions, logic, rules, or code operable to execute the processor 4320.
  • the second kiosk 3916 comprises a processor 4330, a network interface 4332, and a memory 4334.
  • the second kiosk 3916 may be configured as shown or in any other suitable configuration.
  • Processor 4330 comprises one or more processors operably coupled to network interface 4332 and memory 4334.
  • the processor 4330 is any electronic circuitry including, but not limited to, state machines, one or more central processing unit (CPU) chips, logic units, cores (e.g. a multi-core processor), field-programmable gate array (FPGAs), application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs), or digital signal processors (DSPs).
  • the processor 4330 may be a programmable logic device, a microcontroller, a microprocessor, or any suitable combination of the preceding.
  • the one or more processors are configured to process data and may be implemented in hardware or software.
  • the processor 4330 may be 8-bit, 16-bit, 32-bit, 64-bit, or of any other suitable architecture.
  • the processor 4330 may include an arithmetic logic unit (ALU) for performing arithmetic and logic operations, processor registers that supply operands to the ALU and store the results of ALU operations, and a control unit that fetches instructions from memory and executes them by directing the coordinated operations of the ALU, registers and other components.
  • ALU arithmetic logic unit
  • the one or more processors are configured to implement various instructions.
  • the one or more processors are configured to execute instructions or code (e.g., software instructions 4336) to implement functions disclosed herein.
  • processor 4330 may be a special- purpose computer designed to implement the functions disclosed herein.
  • the processor 4330 is implemented using logic units, FPGAs, ASICs, DSPs, or any other suitable hardware.
  • the processor 4330 is configured to operate as described in FIGS. 39-42.
  • Network interface 4332 is configured to enable wired and/or wireless communications (e.g., via network 107).
  • the network interface 4332 is configured to communicate data between the second kiosk 3916 and other devices, servers (e.g., tracking server 106), databases, systems, or domain(s).
  • the network interface 4332 may comprise a WIFI interface, a local area network (LAN) interface, a wide area network (WAN) interface, a modem, a switch, or a router.
  • the processor 4330 is configured to send and receive data using the network interface 4332.
  • the network interface 4332 may be configured to use any suitable type of communication protocol as would be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • Memory 4334 may be volatile or non-volatile and may comprise a read-only memory (ROM), random-access memory (RAM), ternary content-addressable memory (TCAM), dynamic random-access memory (DRAM), and static random-access memory (SRAM).
  • ROM read-only memory
  • RAM random-access memory
  • TCAM ternary content-addressable memory
  • DRAM dynamic random-access memory
  • SRAM static random-access memory
  • Memory 4334 may be implemented using one or more disks, tape drives, solid-state drives, and/or the like.
  • Memory 4334 is operable to store software instructions 4336, and/or any other data or instructions.
  • the software instructions 4336 may comprise any suitable set of instructions, logic, rules, or code operable to execute the processor 4330.

Landscapes

  • Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Accounting & Taxation (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Finance (AREA)
  • Strategic Management (AREA)
  • General Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Image Analysis (AREA)

Abstract

Un système de suivi comprend un ensemble de caméras, un kiosque et un serveur de suivi. Le kiosque reçoit un montant de paiement provenant d'une personne. Le serveur de suivi extrait des caractéristiques de la personne à partir d'un flux d'images reçu de l'ensemble de caméras. Le serveur de suivi génère un identifiant de session qui est associé au montant de paiement et à un code unique. Le code unique représente le montant de paiement et/ou les caractéristiques de la personne. Le serveur de suivi envoie un message au kiosque pour fournir un ticket correspondant au montant de paiement et au code unique à la personne. Le serveur de suivi reçoit un chariot numérique associé à la personne comprenant des articles et une valeur monétaire totale des articles. Le serveur de suivi conclut une transaction en déduisant la valeur monétaire totale du montant de paiement.
PCT/US2021/072541 2020-11-25 2021-11-22 Système et procédé pour fournir des tickets générés par machine pour faciliter le suivi WO2022115845A1 (fr)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US17/104,296 US11023740B2 (en) 2019-10-25 2020-11-25 System and method for providing machine-generated tickets to facilitate tracking
US17/104,296 2020-11-25

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022115845A1 true WO2022115845A1 (fr) 2022-06-02

Family

ID=79024118

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2021/072541 WO2022115845A1 (fr) 2020-11-25 2021-11-22 Système et procédé pour fournir des tickets générés par machine pour faciliter le suivi

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2022115845A1 (fr)

Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20170323376A1 (en) * 2016-05-09 2017-11-09 Grabango Co. System and method for computer vision driven applications within an environment
US20190043281A1 (en) * 2017-08-04 2019-02-07 James Andrew Aman Theme park gamification, guest tracking and access control system
US10282852B1 (en) * 2018-07-16 2019-05-07 Accel Robotics Corporation Autonomous store tracking system
CN110009836A (zh) * 2019-03-29 2019-07-12 江西理工大学 基于高光谱摄像技术的深度学习的系统及方法
US20200019921A1 (en) * 2018-07-16 2020-01-16 Accel Robotics Corporation Smart shelf system that integrates images and quantity sensors
US10614318B1 (en) 2019-10-25 2020-04-07 7-Eleven, Inc. Sensor mapping to a global coordinate system using a marker grid
US10621444B1 (en) 2019-10-25 2020-04-14 7-Eleven, Inc. Action detection during image tracking
US10789720B1 (en) 2019-10-25 2020-09-29 7-Eleven, Inc. Multi-camera image tracking on a global plane

Patent Citations (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20170323376A1 (en) * 2016-05-09 2017-11-09 Grabango Co. System and method for computer vision driven applications within an environment
US20190043281A1 (en) * 2017-08-04 2019-02-07 James Andrew Aman Theme park gamification, guest tracking and access control system
US10282852B1 (en) * 2018-07-16 2019-05-07 Accel Robotics Corporation Autonomous store tracking system
US20200019921A1 (en) * 2018-07-16 2020-01-16 Accel Robotics Corporation Smart shelf system that integrates images and quantity sensors
CN110009836A (zh) * 2019-03-29 2019-07-12 江西理工大学 基于高光谱摄像技术的深度学习的系统及方法
US10614318B1 (en) 2019-10-25 2020-04-07 7-Eleven, Inc. Sensor mapping to a global coordinate system using a marker grid
US10621444B1 (en) 2019-10-25 2020-04-14 7-Eleven, Inc. Action detection during image tracking
US10685237B1 (en) 2019-10-25 2020-06-16 7-Eleven, Inc. Action detection during image tracking
US10769451B1 (en) 2019-10-25 2020-09-08 7-Eleven, Inc. Sensor mapping to a global coordinate system using a marker grid
US10789720B1 (en) 2019-10-25 2020-09-29 7-Eleven, Inc. Multi-camera image tracking on a global plane

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US10853663B1 (en) Action detection during image tracking
US11430222B2 (en) Sensor mapping to a global coordinate system using a marker grid
US11205277B2 (en) Multi-camera image tracking on a global plane
US11861852B2 (en) Image-based action detection using contour dilation
US11023740B2 (en) System and method for providing machine-generated tickets to facilitate tracking
US11625918B2 (en) Detecting shelf interactions using a sensor array
US11721041B2 (en) Sensor mapping to a global coordinate system
US11756216B2 (en) Object re-identification during image tracking
US11756211B2 (en) Topview object tracking using a sensor array
US11625923B2 (en) Object assignment during image tracking
US11568554B2 (en) Contour-based detection of closely spaced objects
US11657517B2 (en) Auto-exclusion zone for contour-based object detection
US11659139B2 (en) Determining candidate object identities during image tracking
US11257225B2 (en) Sensor mapping to a global coordinate system using homography
US11403772B2 (en) Vector-based object re-identification during image tracking
WO2021081297A1 (fr) Détection d'action pendant le suivi d'image
WO2022115845A1 (fr) Système et procédé pour fournir des tickets générés par machine pour faciliter le suivi

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21827367

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21827367

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1